Central processor with multiple programmable processor units

Description

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to digital image processing and in particular discloses Camera System Containing a VLIW Vector Processor.

Further the present invention relates to an image processing method and apparatus and, in particular, discloses a Digital Instant Camera with Image Processing Capability.

The present invention further relates to the field of digital camera technology and, particularly, discloses a digital camera having an integral color printer.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

Traditional camera technology has for many years relied upon the provision of an optical processing system which relies on a negative of an image which is projected onto a photosensitive film which is subsequently chemically processed so as to “fix” the film and to allow for positive prints to be produced which reproduce the original image. Such an image processing technology, although it has become a standard, can be unduly complex, as expensive and difficult technologies are involved in full color processing of images. Recently, digital cameras have become available. These cameras normally rely upon the utilization of a charged coupled device (CCD) to sense a particular image. The camera normally includes storage media for the storage of the sensed scenes in addition to a connector for the transfer of images to a computer device for subsequent manipulation and printing out.

Such devices are generally inconvenient in that all images must be stored by the camera and printed out at some later stage. Hence, the camera must have sufficient storage capabilities for the storing of multiple images and, additionally, the user of the camera must have access to a subsequent computer system for the downloading of the images and printing out by a computer printer or the like.

Further, digital camera devices have only limited on board processing capabilities which can only perform limited manipulation of sensed image. The main function of the on board processing capability is to store the sensed image. As it may be desirable to carry out extensive modification of an image, the capabilities of such digital camera devices are considered inadequate.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

The present invention relates to the provision of a digital camera system having significant on-board computational capabilities for the manipulation of images.

In accordance with a first aspect of the present invention, there is provided a digital camera system comprising a sensing means for sensing an image; modification means for modifying the sensed image in accordance with modification instructions input into the camera; and an output means for outputting the modified image; wherein the modification means includes a series of processing elements arranged around a central crossbar switch. Preferably, the processing elements include an Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) acting under the control of a microcode store wherein the microcode store comprises a writeable control store. The processing elements can include an internal input and output FIFO for storing pixel data utilized by the processing elements and the modification means is interconnected to a read and write FIFO for reading and writing pixel data of images to the modification means.

Each of the processing elements can be arranged in a ring and each element is also separately connected to its nearest neighbours. The ALU accepts a series of inputs interconnected via an internal crossbar switch to a series of core processing units within the ALU and includes a number of internal registers for the storage of temporary data. The core processing units can include at least one one of a multiplier, an adder and a barrel shifter.

The processing elements are further connected to a common data bus for the transfer of pixel data to the processing elements and the data bus is interconnected to a data cache which acts as an intermediate cache between the processing elements and a memory store for storing the images.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

Notwithstanding any other forms that may fall within the scope of the present invention, preferred forms of the invention will now be described, by way of example only, with reference to the accompanying drawings in which:

FIG. 1 illustrates an Artcam device constructed in accordance with the preferred embodiment;

FIG. 2 is a schematic block diagram of the main Artcam electronic components;

FIG. 2A is a schematic block diagram of the main Artcam components, including an array of capacitive sensors for actuation by an actuating formation on a printing cartridge;

FIG. 3 is a schematic block diagram of the Artcam Central Processor;

FIG. 3A illustrates the VLIW Vector Processor in more detail;

FIG. 3B is a schematic block diagram of the Artcam Central Processor incorporating an interface for the array of capacitive sensors;

FIG. 4 illustrates the Processing Unit in more detail;

FIG. 5 illustrates the ALU 188 in more detail;

FIG. 6 illustrates the In block in more detail;

FIG. 7 illustrates the Out block in more detail;

FIG. 8 illustrates the Registers block in more detail;

FIG. 9 illustrates the Crossbar1 in more detail;

FIG. 10 illustrates the Crossbar2 in more detail;

FIG. 11 illustrates the read process block in more detail;

FIG. 12 illustrates the read process block in more detail;

FIG. 13 illustrates the barrel shifter block in more detail;

FIG. 14 illustrates the adder/logic block in more detail;

FIG. 15 illustrates the multiply block in more detail;

FIG. 16 illustrates the I/O address generator block in more detail;

FIG. 17 illustrates a pixel storage format;

FIG. 18 illustrates a sequential read iterator process;

FIG. 19 illustrates a box read iterator process;

FIG. 20 illustrates a box write iterator process;

FIG. 21 illustrates the vertical strip read/write iterator process;

FIG. 22 illustrates the vertical strip read/write iterator process;

FIG. 23 illustrates the generate sequential process;

FIG. 24 illustrates the generate sequential process;

FIG. 25 illustrates the generate vertical strip process;

FIG. 26 illustrates the generate vertical strip process;

FIG. 27 illustrates a pixel data configuration;

FIG. 28 illustrates a pixel processing process;

FIG. 29 illustrates a schematic block diagram of the display controller;

FIG. 30 illustrates the CCD image organization;

FIG. 31 illustrates the storage format for a logical image;

FIG. 32 illustrates the internal image memory storage format;

FIG. 33 illustrates the image pyramid storage format;

FIG. 34 illustrates a time line of the process of sampling an Artcard;

FIG. 35 illustrates the super sampling process;

FIG. 36 illustrates the process of reading a rotated Artcard;

FIG. 37 illustrates a flow chart of the steps necessary to decode an Artcard;

FIG. 38 illustrates an enlargement of the left hand corner of a single Artcard;

FIG. 39 illustrates a single target for detection;

FIG. 40 illustrates the method utilised to detect targets;

FIG. 41 illustrates the method of calculating the distance between two targets;

FIG. 42 illustrates the process of centroid drift;

FIG. 43 shows one form of centroid lookup table;

FIG. 44 illustrates the centroid updating process;

FIG. 45 illustrates a delta processing lookup table utilised in the preferred embodiment;

FIG. 46 illustrates the process of unscrambling Artcard data;

FIG. 47 illustrates a magnified view of a series of dots;

FIG. 48 illustrates the data surface of a dot card;

FIG. 49 illustrates schematically the layout of a single datablock;

FIG. 50 illustrates a single datablock;

FIG. 51 and FIG. 52 illustrate magnified views of portions of the datablock of FIG. 50;

FIG. 53 illustrates a single target structure;

FIG. 54 illustrates the target structure of a datablock;

FIG. 55 illustrates the positional relationship of targets relative to border clocking regions of a data region;

FIG. 56 illustrates the orientation columns of a datablock;

FIG. 57 illustrates the array of dots of a datablock;

FIG. 58 illustrates schematically the structure of data for Reed-Solomon encoding;

FIG. 59 illustrates an example Reed-Solomon encoding;

FIG. 60 illustrates the Reed-Solomon encoding process;

FIG. 61 illustrates the layout of encoded data within a datablock;

FIG. 62 illustrates the sampling process in sampling an alternative Artcard;

FIG. 63 illustrates, in exaggerated form, an example of sampling a rotated alternative Artcard;

FIG. 64 illustrates the scanning process;

FIG. 65 illustrates the likely scanning distribution of the scanning process;

FIG. 66 illustrates the relationship between probability of symbol errors and Reed-Solomon block errors;

FIG. 67 illustrates a flow chart of the decoding process;

FIG. 68 illustrates a process utilization diagram of the decoding process;

FIG. 69 illustrates the dataflow steps in decoding;

FIG. 70 illustrates the reading process in more detail;

FIG. 71 illustrates the process of detection of the start of an alternative Artcard in more detail;

FIG. 72 illustrates the extraction of bit data process in more detail;

FIG. 73 illustrates the segmentation process utilized in the decoding process;

FIG. 74 illustrates the decoding process of finding targets in more detail;

FIG. 75 illustrates the data structures utilized in locating targets;

FIG. 76 illustrates the Lancos 3 function structure;

FIG. 77 illustrates an enlarged portion of a datablock illustrating the clockmark and border region;

FIG. 78 illustrates the processing steps in decoding a bit image;

FIG. 79 illustrates the dataflow steps in decoding a bit image;

FIG. 80 illustrates the descrambling process of the preferred embodiment;

FIG. 81 illustrates one form of implementation of the convolver;

FIG. 82 illustrates a convolution process;

FIG. 83 illustrates the compositing process;

FIG. 84 illustrates the regular compositing process in more detail;

FIG. 85 illustrates the process of warping using a warp map;

FIG. 86 illustrates the warping bi-linear interpolation process;

FIG. 87 illustrates the process of span calculation;

FIG. 88 illustrates the basic span calculation process;

FIG. 89 illustrates one form of detail implementation of the span calculation process;

FIG. 90 illustrates the process of reading image pyramid levels;

FIG. 91 illustrates using the pyramid table for bilinear interpolation;

FIG. 92 illustrates the histogram collection process;

FIG. 93 illustrates the color transform process;

FIG. 94 illustrates the color conversion process;

FIG. 95 illustrates the color space conversion process in more detail;

FIG. 96 illustrates the process of calculating an input coordinate;

FIG. 97 illustrates the process of compositing with feedback;

FIG. 98 illustrates the generalized scaling process;

FIG. 99 illustrates the scale in X scaling process;

FIG. 100 illustrates the scale in Y scaling process;

FIG. 101 illustrates the tessellation process;

FIG. 102 illustrates the sub-pixel translation process;

FIG. 103 illustrates the compositing process;

FIG. 104 illustrates the process of compositing with feedback;

FIG. 105 illustrates the process of tiling with color from the input image;

FIG. 106 illustrates the process of tiling with feedback;

FIG. 107 illustrates the process of tiling with texture replacement;

FIG. 108 illustrates the process of tiling with color from the input image;

FIG. 109 illustrates the process of applying a texture without feedback;

FIG. 110 illustrates the process of applying a texture with feedback;

FIG. 111 illustrates the process of rotation of CCD pixels;

FIG. 112 illustrates the process of interpolation of Green subpixels;

FIG. 113 illustrates the process of interpolation of Blue subpixels;

FIG. 114 illustrates the process of interpolation of Red subpixels;

FIG. 115 illustrates the process of CCD pixel interpolation with 0 degree rotation for odd pixel lines;

FIG. 116 illustrates the process of CCD pixel interpolation with 0 degree rotation for even pixel lines;

FIG. 117 illustrates the process of color conversion to Lab color space;

FIG. 118 illustrates the logical layout of a single printhead;

FIG. 119 illustrates the structure of the printhead interface;

FIG. 120 illustrates the process of rotation of a Lab image;

FIG. 121 illustrates the format of a pixel of the printed image;

FIG. 122 illustrates the dithering process;

FIG. 123 illustrates the process of generating an 8 bit dot output;

FIG. 124 illustrates a perspective view of the card reader;

FIG. 125 illustrates an exploded perspective of a card reader;

FIG. 126 illustrates a close up view of the Artcard reader;

FIG. 127 illustrates a layout of the software/hardware modules of the overall Artcam application;

FIG. 128 illustrates a layout of the software/hardware modules of the Camera Manager;

FIG. 129 illustrates a layout of the software/hardware modules of the Image Processing Manager;

FIG. 130 illustrates a layout of the software/hardware modules of the Printer Manager;

FIG. 131 illustrates a layout of the software/hardware modules of the Image Processing Manager;

FIG. 132 illustrates a layout of the software/hardware modules of the File Manager;

DESCRIPTION OF PREFERRED AND OTHER EMBODIMENTS

The digital image processing camera system constructed in accordance with the preferred embodiment is as illustrated in FIG. 1. The camera unit 1 includes means for the insertion of an integral print roll (not shown). The camera unit 1 can include an area image sensor 2 which sensors an image 3 for captured by the camera. Optionally, the second area image sensor can be provided to also image the scene 3 and to optionally provide for the production of stereographic output effects.

The camera 1 can include an optional color display 5 for the display of the image being sensed by the sensor 2. When a simple image is being displayed on the display 5, the button 6 can be depressed resulting in the printed image 8 being output by the camera unit 1. A series of cards, herein after known as “Artcards” 9 contain, on one surface encoded information and on the other surface, contain an image distorted by the particular effect produced by the Artcard 9. The Artcard 9 is inserted in an Artcard reader 10 in the side of camera 1 and, upon insertion, results in output image 8 being distorted in the same manner as the distortion appearing on the surface of Artcard 9. Hence, by means of this simple user interface a user wishing to produce a particular effect can insert one of many Artcards 9 into the Artcard reader 10 and utilize button 19 to take a picture of the image 3 resulting in a corresponding distorted output image 8.

The camera unit 1 can also include a number of other control button 13, 14 in addition to a simple LCD output display 15 for the display of informative information including the number of printouts left on the internal print roll on the camera unit. Additionally, different output formats can be controlled by CHP switch 17.

Turning now to FIG. 2, there is illustrated a schematic view of the internal hardware of the camera unit 1. The internal hardware is based around an Artcam central processor unit (ACP) 31.

Artcam Central Processor 31

The Artcam central processor 31 provides many functions which form the ‘heart’ of the system. The ACP 31 is preferably implemented as a complex, high speed, CMOS system on-a-chip. Utilising standard cell design with some full custom regions is recommended. Fabrication on a 0.25 micron CMOS process will provide the density and speed required, along with a reasonably small die area.

The functions provided by the ACP 31 include:

1. Control and digitization of the area image sensor 2. A 3D stereoscopic version of the ACP requires two area image sensor interfaces with a second optional image sensor 4 being provided for stereoscopic effects.

2. Area image sensor compensation, reformatting, and image enhancement.

3. Memory interface and management to a memory store 33.

4. Interface, control, and analog to digital conversion of an Artcard reader linear image sensor 34 which is provided for the reading of data from the Artcards 9.

5. Extraction of the raw Artcard data from the digitized and encoded Artcard image.

6. Reed-Solomon error detection and correction of the Artcard encoded data. The encoded surface of the Artcard 9 includes information on how to process an image to produce the effects displayed on the image distorted surface of the Artcard 9. This information is in the form of a script, hereinafter known as a “Vark script”. The Vark script is utilised by an interpreter running within the ACP 31 to produce the desired effect.

7. Interpretation of the Vark script on the Artcard 9.

8. Performing image processing operations as specified by the Vark script.

9. Controlling various motors for the paper transport 36, zoom lens 38, autofocus 39 and Artcard driver 37.

10. Controlling a guillotine actuator 40 for the operation of a guillotine 41 for the cutting of photographs 8 from print roll 42.

11. Half-toning of the image data for printing.

12. Providing the print data to a print-head 44 at the appropriate times.

13. Controlling the print head 44.

14. Controlling the ink pressure feed to print-head 44.

15. Controlling optional flash unit 56.

16. Reading and acting on various sensors in the camera, including camera orientation sensor 46, autofocus 47 and Artcard insertion sensor 49.

17. Reading and acting on the user interface buttons 6, 13, 14.

18. Controlling the status display 15.

19. Providing viewfinder and preview images to the color display 5.

20. Control of the system power consumption, including the ACP power consumption via power management circuit 51.

21. Providing external communications 52 to general purpose computers (using part USB).

22. Reading and storing information in a printing roll authentication chip 53.

23. Reading and storing information in a camera authentication chip 54.

24. Communicating with an optional mini-keyboard 57 for text modification.

Quartz Crystal 58

A quartz crystal 58 is used as a frequency reference for the system clock. As the system clock is very high, the ACP 31 includes a phase locked loop clock circuit to increase the frequency derived from the crystal 58.

Image Sensing

Area Image Sensor 2 The area image sensor 2 converts an image through its lens into an electrical signal. It can either be a charge coupled device (CCD) or an active pixel sensor (APS) CMOS image sector. At present, available CCD's normally have a higher image quality, however, there is currently much development occurring in CMOS imagers. CMOS imagers are eventually expected to be substantially cheaper than CCD's have smaller pixel areas, and be able to incorporate drive circuitry and signal processing. They can also be made in CMOS fabs, which are transitioning to 12″ wafers. CCD's are usually built in 6″ wafer fabs, and economics may not allow a conversion to 12″ fabs. Therefore, the difference in fabrication cost between CCD's and CMOS imagers is likely to increase, progressively favoring CMOS imagers. However, at present, a CCD is probably the best option.

The Artcam unit will produce suitable results with a 1,500×1,000 area image sensor. However, smaller sensors, such as 750×500, will be adequate for many markets. The Artcam is less sensitive to image sensor resolution than are conventional digital cameras. This is because many of the styles contained on Artcards 9 process the image in such a way as to obscure the lack of resolution. For example, if the image is distorted to simulate the effect of being converted to an impressionistic painting, low source image resolution can be used with minimal effect. Further examples for which low resolution input images will typically not be noticed include image warps which produce high distorted images, multiple miniature copies of the of the image (eg. passport photos), textural processing such as bump mapping for a base relief metal look, and photo-compositing into structured scenes.

This tolerance of low resolution image sensors may be a significant factor in reducing the manufacturing cost of an Artcam unit 1 camera. An Artcam with a low cost 750×500 image sensor will often produce superior results to a conventional digital camera with a much more expensive 1,500×1,000 image sensor.

Optional Stereoscopic 3D Image Sensor 4

The 3D versions of the Artcam unit 1 have an additional image sensor 4, for stereoscopic operation. This image sensor is identical to the main image sensor. The circuitry to drive the optional image sensor may be included as a standard part of the ACP chip 31 to reduce incremental design cost. Alternatively, a separate 3D Artcam ACP can be designed. This option will reduce the manufacturing cost of a mainstream single sensor Artcam.

Print Roll Authentication Chip 53

A small chip 53 is included in each print roll 42. This chip replaced the functions of the bar code, optical sensor and wheel, and ISO/ASA sensor on other forms of camera film units such as Advanced Photo Systems film cartridges.

The authentication chip also provides other features:

1. The storage of data rather than that which is mechanically and optically sensed from APS rolls

2. A remaining media length indication, accurate to high resolution.

3. Authentication Information to prevent inferior clone print roll copies.

The authentication chip 53 contains 1024 bits of Flash memory, of which 128 bits is an authentication key, and 512 bits is the authentication information. Also included is an encryption circuit to ensure that the authentication key cannot be accessed directly.

Print-Head 44

The Artcam unit 1 can utilize any color print technology which is small enough, low enough power, fast enough, high enough quality, and low enough cost, and is compatible with the print roll. Relevant printheads will be specifically discussed hereinafter.

The specifications of the ink jet head are:

Image type
Bi-level, dithered

Color
CMY Process Color

Resolution
1600 dpi

Print head length
‘Page-width’ (100 mm)

Print speed
2 seconds per photo

Optional Ink Pressure Controller (not Shown)

The function of the ink pressure controller depends upon the type of ink jet print head 44 incorporated in the Artcam. For some types of ink jet, the use of an ink pressure controller can be eliminated, as the ink pressure is simply atmospheric pressure. Other types of print head require a regulated positive ink pressure. In this case, the in pressure controller consists of a pump and pressure transducer.

Other print heads may require an ultrasonic transducer to cause regular oscillations in the ink pressure, typically at frequencies around 100 KHz. In the case, the ACP 31 controls the frequency phase and amplitude of these oscillations.

Paper Transport Motor 36

The paper transport motor 36 moves the paper from within the print roll 42 past the print head at a relatively constant rate. The motor 36 is a miniature motor geared down to an appropriate speed to drive rollers which move the paper. A high quality motor and mechanical gears are required to achieve high image quality, as mechanical rumble or other vibrations will affect the printed dot row spacing.

Paper Transport Motor Driver 60

The motor driver 60 is a small circuit which amplifies the digital motor control signals from the APC 31 to levels suitable for driving the motor 36.

Paper Pull Sensor

A paper pull sensor 50 detects a user's attempt to pull a photo from the camera unit during the printing process. The APC 31 reads this sensor 50, and activates the guillotine 41 if the condition occurs. The paper pull sensor 50 is incorporated to make the camera more ‘foolproof’ in operation. Were the user to pull the paper out forcefully during printing, the print mechanism 44 or print roll 42 may (in extreme cases) be damaged. Since it is acceptable to pull out the ‘pod’ from a Polaroid type camera before it is fully ejected, the public has been ‘trained’ to do this. Therefore, they are unlikely to heed printed instructions not to pull the paper.

The Artcam preferably restarts the photo print process after the guillotine 41 has cut the paper after pull sensing.

The pull sensor can be implemented as a strain gauge sensor, or as an optical sensor detecting a small plastic flag which is deflected by the torque that occurs on the paper drive rollers when the paper is pulled. The latter implementation is recommendation for low cost.

Paper Guillotine Actuator 40

The paper guillotine actuator 40 is a small actuator which causes the guillotine 41 to cut the paper either at the end of a photograph, or when the paper pull sensor 50 is activated.

The guillotine actuator 40 is a small circuit which amplifies a guillotine control signal from the APC tot the level required by the actuator 41.

Artcard 9

The Artcard 9 is a program storage medium for the Artcam unit. As noted previously, the programs are in the form of Vark scripts. Vark is a powerful image processing language especially developed for the Artcam unit. Each Artcard 9 contains one Vark script, and thereby defines one image processing style.

Preferably, the VARK language is highly image processing specific. By being highly image processing specific, the amount of storage required to store the details on the card are substantially reduced. Further, the ease with which new programs can be created, including enhanced effects, is also substantially increased. Preferably, the language includes facilities for handling many image processing functions including image warping via a warp map, convolution, color lookup tables, posterizing an image, adding noise to an image, image enhancement filters, painting algorithms, brush jittering and manipulation edge detection filters, tiling, illumination via light sources, bump maps, text, face detection and object detection attributes, fonts, including three dimensional fonts, and arbitrary complexity pre-rendered icons. Further details of the operation of the Vark language interpreter are contained hereinafter.

Hence, by utilizing the language constructs as defined by the created language, new affects on arbitrary images can be created and constructed for inexpensive storage on Artcard and subsequent distribution to camera owners. Further, on one surface of the card can be provided an example illustrating the effect that a particular VARK script, stored on the other surface of the card, will have on an arbitrary captured image.

By utilizing such a system, camera technology can be distributed without a great fear of obsolescence in that, provided a VARK interpreter is incorporated in the camera device, a device independent scenario is provided whereby the underlying technology can be completely varied over time. Further, the VARK scripts can be updated as new filters are created and distributed in an inexpensive manner, such as via simple cards for card reading.

The Artcard 9 is a piece of thin white plastic with the same format as a credit card (86 mm long by 54 mm wide). The Artcard is printed on both sides using a high resolution ink jet printer. The inkjet printer technology is assumed to be the same as that used in the Artcam, with 1600 dpi (63 dpmm) resolution. A major feature of the Artcard 9 is low manufacturing cost. Artcards can be manufactured at high speeds as a wide web of plastic film. The plastic web is coated on both sides with a hydrophilic dye fixing layer. The web is printed simultaneously on both sides using a ‘pagewidth’ color ink jet printer. The web is then cut and punched into individual cards. On one face of the card is printed a human readable representation of the effect the Artcard 9 will have on the sensed image. This can be simply a standard image which has been processed using the Vark script stored on the back face of the card.

On the back face of the card is printed an array of dots which can be decoded into the Vark script that defines the image processing sequence. The print area is 80 mm×50 mm, giving a total of 15,876,000 dots. This array of dots could represent at least 1.89 Mbytes of data. To achieve high reliability, extensive error detection and correction is incorporated in the array of dots. This allows a substantial portion of the card to be defaced, worn, creased, or dirty with no effect on data integrity. The data coding used is Reed-Solomon coding, with half of the data devoted to error correction. This allows the storage of 967 Kbytes of error corrected data on each Artcard 9.

Linear Image Sensor 34

The Artcard linear sensor 34 converts the aforementioned Artcard data image to electrical signals. As with the area image sensor 2, 4, the linear image sensor can be fabricated using either CCD or APS CMOS technology. The active length of the image sensor 34 is 50 mm, equal to the width of the data array on the Artcard 9. To satisfy Nyquist's sampling theorem, the resolution of the linear image sensor 34 must be at least twice the highest spatial frequency of the Artcard optical image reaching the image sensor. In practice, data detection is easier if the image sensor resolution is substantially above this. A resolution of 4800 dpi (189 dpmm) is chosen, giving a total of 9,450 pixels. This resolution requires a pixel sensor pitch of 5.3 μm. This can readily be achieved by using four staggered rows of 20 μm pixel sensors.

The linear image sensor is mounted in a special package which includes a LED 65 to illuminate the Artcard 9 via a light-pipe (not shown).

The Artcard reader light-pipe can be a molded light-pipe which has several function:

1. It diffuses the light from the LED over the width of the card using total internal reflection facets.

2. It focuses the light onto a 16 μm wide strip of the Artcard 9 using an integrated cylindrical lens.

3. It focuses light reflected from the Artcard onto the linear image sensor pixels using a molded array of microlenses.

The operation of the Artcard reader is explained further hereinafter.

Artcard Reader Motor 37

The Artcard reader motor propels the Artcard past the linear image sensor 34 at a relatively constant rate. As it may not be cost effective to include extreme precision mechanical components in the Artcard reader, the motor 37 is a standard miniature motor geared down to an appropriate speed to drive a pair of rollers which move the Artcard 9. The speed variations, rumble, and other vibrations will affect the raw image data as circuitry within the APC 31 includes extensive compensation for these effects to reliably read the Artcard data.

The motor 37 is driven in reverse when the Artcard is to be ejected.

Artcard Motor Driver 61

The Artcard motor driver 61 is a small circuit which amplifies the digital motor control signals from the APC 31 to levels suitable for driving the motor 37.

Card Insertion Sensor 49

The card insertion sensor 49 is an optical sensor which detects the presence of a card as it is being inserted in the card reader 34. Upon a signal from this sensor 49, the APC 31 initiates the card reading process, including the activation of the Artcard reader motor 37.

Card Eject Button 16

A card eject button 16 (FIG. 1) is used by the user to eject the current Artcard, so that another

Artcard can be inserted. The APC 31 detects the pressing of the button, and reverses the Artcard reader motor 37 to eject the card.

Card Status Indicator 66

A card status indicator 66 is provided to signal the user as to the status of the Artcard reading process. This can be a standard bi-color (red/green) LED. When the card is successfully read, and data integrity has been verified, the LED lights up green continually. If the card is faulty, then the LED lights up red.

If the camera is powered from a 1.5 V instead of 3V battery, then the power supply voltage is less than the forward voltage drop of the greed LED, and the LED will not light. In this case, red LEDs can be used, or the LED can be powered from a voltage pump which also powers other circuits in the Artcam which require higher voltage.

64 Mbit DRAM 33

To perform the wide variety of image processing effects, the camera utilizes 8 Mbytes of memory 33. This can be provided by a single 64 Mbit memory chip. Of course, with changing memory technology increased Dram storage sizes may be substituted.

High speed access to the memory chip is required. This can be achieved by using a Rambus DRAM (burst access rate of 500 Mbytes per second) or chips using the new open standards such as double data rate (DDR) SDRAM or Synclink DRAM.

Camera Authentication Chip

The camera authentication chip 54 is identical to the print roll authentication chip 53, except that it has different information stored in it. The camera authentication chip 54 has three main purposes:

1. To provide a secure means of comparing authentication codes with the print roll authentication chip;

2. To provide storage for manufacturing information, such as the serial number of the camera;

3. To provide a small amount of non-volatile memory for storage of user information.

Displays

The Artcam includes an optional color display 5 and small status display 15. Lowest cost consumer cameras may include a color image display, such as a small TFT LCD 5 similar to those found on some digital cameras and camcorders. The color display 5 is a major cost element of these versions of Artcam, and the display 5 plus back light are a major power consumption drain.

Status Display 15

The status display 15 is a small passive segment based LCD, similar to those currently provided on silver halide and digital cameras. Its main function is to show the number of prints remaining in the print roll 42 and icons for various standard camera features, such as flash and battery status.

Color Display 5

The color display 5 is a full motion image display which operates as a viewfinder, as a verification of the image to be printed, and as a user interface display. The cost of the display 5 is approximately proportional to its area, so large displays (say 4″ diagonal) unit will be restricted to expensive versions of the Artcam unit. Smaller displays, such as color camcorder viewfinder TFT's at around 1″, may be effective for mid-range Artcams.

Zoom Lens (not Shown)

The Artcam can include a zoom lens. This can be a standard electronically controlled zoom lens, identical to one which would be used on a standard electronic camera, and similar to pocket camera zoom lenses. A referred version of the Artcam unit may include standard interchangeable 35 mm SLR lenses.

Autofocus Motor 39

The autofocus motor 39 changes the focus of the zoom lens. The motor is a miniature motor geared down to an appropriate speed to drive the autofocus mechanism.

Autofocus Motor Driver 63

The autofocus motor driver 63 is a small circuit which amplifies the digital motor control signals from the APC 31 to levels suitable for driving the motor 39.

Zoom Motor 38

The zoom motor 38 moves the zoom front lenses in and out. The motor is a miniature motor geared down to an appropriate speed to drive the zoom mechanism.

Zoom Motor Driver 62

The zoom motor driver 62 is a small circuit which amplifies the digital motor control signals from the APC 31 to levels suitable for driving the motor.

Communications

The ACP 31 contains a universal serial bus (USB) interface 52 for communication with personal computers. Not all Artcam models are intended to include the USB connector. However, the silicon area required for a USB circuit 52 is small, so the interface can be included in the standard ACP.

Optional Keyboard 57

The Artcam unit may include an optional miniature keyboard 57 for customizing text specified by the Artcard. Any text appearing in an Artcard image may be editable, even if it is in a complex metallic 3D font. The miniature keyboard includes a single line alphanumeric LCD to display the original text and edited text. The keyboard may be a standard accessory.

The ACP 31 contains a serial communications circuit for transferring data to and from the miniature keyboard.

Power Supply

The Artcam unit uses a battery 48. Depending upon the Artcam options, this is either a 3V Lithium cell, 1.5 V AA alkaline cells, or other battery arrangement.

Power Management Unit 51

Power consumption is an important design constraint in the Artcam. It is desirable that either standard camera batteries (such as 3V lithium batters) or standard AA or AAA alkaline cells can be used. While the electronic complexity of the Artcam unit is dramatically higher than 35 mm photographic cameras, the power consumption need not be commensurately higher. Power in the Artcam can be carefully managed with all unit being turned off when not in use.

The most significant current drains are the ACP 31, the area image sensors 2,4, the printer 44 various motors, the flash unit 56, and the optional color display 5 dealing with each part separately:

1. ACP: If fabricated using 0.25 μm CMOS, and running on 1.5V, the ACP power consumption can be quite low. Clocks to various parts of the ACP chip can be quite low. Clocks to various parts of the ACP chip can be turned off when not in use, virtually eliminating standby current consumption. The ACP will only fully used for approximately 4 seconds for each photograph printed.

2. Area image sensor: power is only supplied to the area image sensor when the user has their finger on the button.

3. The printer power is only supplied to the printer when actually printing. This is for around 2 seconds for each photograph. Even so, suitably lower power consumption printing should be used.

4. The motors required in the Artcam are all low power miniature motors, and are typically only activated for a few seconds per photo.

5. The flash unit 45 is only used for some photographs. Its power consumption can readily be provided by a 3V lithium battery for a reasonably battery life.

6. The optional color display 5 is a major current drain for two reasons: it must be on for the whole time that the camera is in use, and a backlight will be required if a liquid crystal display is used. Cameras which incorporate a color display will require a larger battery to achieve acceptable batter life.

Flash Unit 56

The flash unit 56 can be a standard miniature electronic flash for consumer cameras.

Overview of the ACP 31

FIG. 3 illustrates the Artcam Central Processor (ACP) 31 in more detail. The Artcam Central Processor provides all of the processing power for Artcam. It is designed for a 0.25 micron CMOS process, with approximately 1.5 million transistors and an area of around 50 mm². The ACP 31 is a complex design, but design effort can be reduced by the use of datapath compilation techniques, macrocells, and IP cores. The ACP 31 contains:

- A RISC CPU core 72
- A 4 way parallel VLIW Vector Processor 74
- A Direct RAMbus interface 81
- A CMOS image sensor interface 83
- A CMOS linear image sensor interface 88
- A USB serial interface 52
- An infrared keyboard interface 55
- A numeric LCD interface 84, and
- A color TFT LCD interface 88
- A 4 Mbyte Flash memory 70 for program storage 70
  
  The RISC CPU, Direct RAMbus interface 81, CMOS sensor interface 83 and USB serial interface 52 can be vendor supplied cores. The ACP 31 is intended to run at a clock speed of 200 MHz on 3V externally and 1.5V internally to minimize power consumption. The CPU core needs only to run at 100 MHz. The following two block diagrams give two views of the ACP 31:
- A View of the ACP 31 in Isolation

An example Artcam showing a high-level view of the ACP 31 connected to the rest of the Artcam hardware.

Image Access

As stated previously, the DRAM Interface 81 is responsible for interfacing between other client portions of the ACP chip and the RAMBUS DRAM. In effect, each module within the DRAM Interface is an address generator.

There are three logical types of images manipulated by the ACP. They are:

- CCD Image, which is the Input Image captured from the CCD.
- Internal Image format—the Image format utilised internally by the Artcam device.

Print Image—the Output Image Format Printed by the Artcam

These images are typically different in color space, resolution, and the output & input color spaces which can vary from camera to camera. For example, a CCD image on a low-end camera may be a different resolution, or have different color characteristics from that used in a high-end camera. However all internal image formats are the same format in terms of color space across all cameras.

In addition, the three image types can vary with respect to which direction is ‘up’. The physical orientation of the camera causes the notion of a portrait or landscape image, and this must be maintained throughout processing. For this reason, the internal image is always oriented correctly, and rotation is performed on images obtained from the CCD and during the print operation.

CPU Core (CPU) 72

The ACP 31 incorporates a 32 bit RISC CPU 72 to run the Vark image processing language interpreter and to perform Artcam's general operating system duties. A wide variety of CPU cores are suitable: it can be any processor core with sufficient processing power to perform the required core calculations and control functions fast enough to met consumer expectations. Examples of suitable cores are: MIPS R4000 core from LSI Logic, StrongARM core. There is no need to maintain instruction set continuity between different Artcam models. Artcard compatibility is maintained irrespective of future processor advances and changes, because the Vark interpreter is simply re-compiled for each new instruction set. The ACP 31 architecture is therefore also free to evolve. Different ACP 31 chip designs may be fabricated by different manufacturers, without requiring to license or port the CPU core. This device independence avoids the chip vendor lock-in such as has occurred in the PC market with Intel. The CPU operates at 100 MHz, with a single cycle time of 10 ns. It must be fast enough to run the Vark interpreter, although the VLIW Vector Processor 74 is responsible for most of the time-critical operations.

Program Cache 72

Although the program code is stored in on-chip Flash memory 70, it is unlikely that well packed Flash memory 70 will be able to operate at the 10 ns cycle time required by the CPU. Consequently a small cache is required for good performance. 16 cache lines of 32 bytes each are sufficient, for a total of 512 bytes. The program cache 72 is defined in the chapter entitled Program cache 72.

Data Cache 76

A small data cache 76 is required for good performance. This requirement is mostly due to the use of a RAMbus DRAM, which can provide high-speed data in bursts, but is inefficient for single byte accesses. The CPU has access to a memory caching system that allows flexible manipulation of CPU data cache 76 sizes. A minimum of 16 cache lines (512 bytes) is recommended for good performance.

CPU Memory Model

An Artcam's CPU memory model consists of a 32 MB area. It consists of 8 MB of physical RDRAM off-chip in the base model of Artcam, with provision for up to 16 MB of off-chip memory. There is a 4 MB Flash memory 70 on the ACP 31 for program storage, and finally a 4 MB address space mapped to the various registers and controls of the ACP 31. The memory map then, for an Artcam is as follows:

Contents
Size

Base Artcam DRAM
8 MB

Extended DRAM
8 MB

Program memory (on ACP 31 in Flash memory 70)
4 MB

Reserved for extension of program memory
4 MB

ACP 31 registers and memory-mapped I/O
4 MB

Reserved
4 MB

TOTAL
32 MB

A straightforward way of decoding addresses is to use address bits 23-24:

- If bit 24 is clear, the address is in the lower 16-MB range, and hence can be satisfied from DRAM and the Data cache 76. In most cases the DRAM will only be 8 MB, but 16 MB is allocated to cater for a higher memory model Artcams.
- If bit 24 is set, and bit 23 is clear, then the address represents the Flash memory 70 4 Mbyte range and is satisfied by the Program cache 72.
- If bit 24=1 and bit 23=1, the address is translated into an access over the low speed bus to the requested component in the AC by the CPU Memory Decoder 68.
  
  Flash Memory 70

The ACP 31 contains a 4 Mbyte Flash memory 70 for storing the Artcam program. It is envisaged that Flash memory 70 will have denser packing coefficients than masked ROM, and allows for greater flexibility for testing camera program code. The downside of the Flash memory 70 is the access time, which is unlikely to be fast enough for the 100 MHz operating speed (10 ns cycle time) of the CPU. A fast Program Instruction cache 77 therefore acts as the interface between the CPU and the slower Flash memory 70.

Program Cache 72

A small cache is required for good CPU performance. This requirement is due to the slow speed Flash memory 70 which stores the Program code. 16 cache lines of 32 bytes each are sufficient, for a total of 512 bytes. The Program cache 72 is a read only cache. The data used by CPU programs comes through the CPU Memory Decoder 68 and if the address is in DRAM, through the general Data cache 76. The separation allows the CPU to operate independently of the VLIW Vector Processor 74. If the data requirements are low for a given process, it can consequently operate completely out of cache.

Finally, the Program cache 72 can be read as data by the CPU rather than purely as program instructions. This allows tables, microcode for the VLIW etc to be loaded from the Flash memory 70. Addresses with bit 24 set and bit 23 clear are satisfied from the Program cache 72.

CPU Memory Decoder 68

The CPU Memory Decoder 68 is a simple decoder for satisfying CPU data accesses. The Decoder translates data addresses into internal ACP register accesses over the internal low speed bus, and therefore allows for memory mapped I/O of ACP registers. The CPU Memory Decoder 68 only interprets addresses that have bit 24 set and bit 23 clear. There is no caching in the CPU Memory Decoder 68.

DRAM Interface 81

The DRAM used by the Artcam is a single channel 64 Mbit (8 MB) RAMbus RDRAM operating at 1.6 GB/sec. RDRAM accesses are by a single channel (16-bit data path) controller. The RDRAM also has several useful operating modes for low power operation. Although the Rambus specification describes a system with random 32 byte transfers as capable of achieving a greater than 95% efficiency, this is not true if only part of the 32 bytes are used. Two reads followed by two writes to the same device yields over 86% efficiency. The primary latency is required for bus turn-around going from a Write to a Read, and since there is a Delayed Write mechanism, efficiency can be further improved. With regards to writes, Write Masks allow specific subsets of bytes to be written to. These write masks would be set via internal cache “dirty bits”. The upshot of the Rambus Direct RDRAM is a throughput of >1 GB/sec is easily achievable, and with multiple reads for every write (most processes) combined with intelligent algorithms making good use of 32 byte transfer knowledge, transfer rates of >1.3 GB/sec are expected. Every 10 ns, 16 bytes can be transferred to or from the core.

Data Cache 76

The ACP 31 contains a dedicated CPU instruction cache 77 and a general data cache 76. The Data cache 76 handles all DRAM requests (reads and writes of data) from the CPU, the VLIW Vector Processor 74, and the Display Controller 88. These requests may have very different profiles in terms of memory usage and algorithmic timing requirements. For example, a VLIW process may be processing an image in linear memory, and lookup a value in a table for each value in the image. There is little need to cache much of the image, but it may be desirable to cache the entire lookup table so that no real memory access is required. Because of these differing requirements, the Data cache 76 allows for an intelligent definition of caching.

Although the Rambus DRAM interface 81 is capable of very high-speed memory access (an average throughput of 32 bytes in 25 ns), it is not efficient dealing with single byte requests. In order to reduce effective memory latency, the ACP 31 contains 128 cache lines. Each cache line is 32 bytes wide. Thus the total amount of data cache 76 is 4096 bytes (4 KB). The 128 cache lines are configured into 16 programmable-sized groups. Each of the 16 groups must be a contiguous set of cache lines. The CPU is responsible for determining how many cache lines to allocate to each group. Within each group cache lines are filled according to a simple Least Recently Used algorithm. In terms of CPU data requests, the Data cache 76 handles memory access requests that have address bit 24 clear. If bit 24 is clear, the address is in the lower 16 MB range, and hence can be satisfied from DRAM and the Data cache 76. In most cases the DRAM will only be 8 MB, but 16 MB is allocated to cater for a higher memory model Artcam. If bit 24 is set, the address is ignored by the Data cache 76.

All CPU data requests are satisfied from Cache Group 0. A minimum of 16 cache lines is recommended for good CPU performance, although the CPU can assign any number of cache lines (except none) to Cache Group 0. The remaining Cache Groups (1 to 15) are allocated according to the current requirements. This could mean allocation to a VLIW Vector Processor 74 program or the Display Controller 88. For example, a 256 byte lookup table required to be permanently available would require 8 cache lines. Writing out a sequential image would only require 2-4 cache lines (depending on the size of record being generated and whether write requests are being Write Delayed for a significant number of cycles). Associated with each cache line byte is a dirty bit, used for creating a Write Mask when writing memory to DRAM. Associated with each cache line is another dirty bit, which indicates whether any of the cache line bytes has been written to (and therefore the cache line must be written back to DRAM before it can be reused). Note that it is possible for two different Cache Groups to be accessing the same address in memory and to get out of sync. The VLIW program writer is responsible to ensure that this is not an issue. It could be perfectly reasonable, for example, to have a Cache Group responsible for reading an image, and another Cache Group responsible for writing the changed image back to memory again. If the images are read or written sequentially there may be advantages in allocating cache lines in this manner. A total of 8 buses 182 connect the VLIW Vector Processor 74 to the Data cache 76. Each bus is connected to an I/O Address Generator. (There are 2 I/O Address Generators 189, 190 per Processing Unit 178, and there are 4 Processing Units in the VLIW Vector Processor 74. The total number of buses is therefore 8.)

In any given cycle, in addition to a single 32 bit (4 byte) access to the CPU's cache group (Group 0), 4 simultaneous accesses of 16 bits (2 bytes) to remaining cache groups are permitted on the 8 VLIW Vector Processor 74 buses. The Data cache 76 is responsible for fairly processing the requests. On a given cycle, no more than 1 request to a specific Cache Group will be processed. Given that there are 8 Address Generators 189, 190 in the VLIW Vector Processor 74, each one of these has the potential to refer to an individual Cache Group. However it is possible and occasionally reasonable for 2 or more Address Generators 189, 190 to access the same Cache Group. The CPU is responsible for ensuring that the Cache Groups have been allocated the correct number of cache lines, and that the various Address Generators 189, 190 in the VLIW Vector Processor 74 reference the specific Cache Groups correctly.

The Data cache 76 as described allows for the Display Controller 88 and VLIW Vector Processor 74 to be active simultaneously. If the operation of these two components were deemed to never occur simultaneously, a total 9 Cache Groups would suffice. The CPU would use Cache Group 0, and the VLIW Vector Processor 74 and the Display Controller 88 would share the remaining 8 Cache Groups, requiring only 3 bits (rather than 4) to define which Cache Group would satisfy a particular request.

JTAG Interface 85

A standard JTAG (Joint Test Action Group) Interface is included in the ACP 31 for testing purposes. Due to the complexity of the chip, a variety of testing techniques are required, including BIST (Built In Self Test) and functional block isolation. An overhead of 10% in chip area is assumed for overall chip testing circuitry. The test circuitry is beyond the scope of this document.

Serial Interfaces

USB Serial Port Interface 52

This is a standard USB serial port, which is connected to the internal chip low speed bus, thereby allowing the CPU to control it.

Keyboard Interface 65

This is a standard low-speed serial port, which is connected to the internal chip low speed bus, thereby allowing the CPU to control it. It is designed to be optionally connected to a keyboard to allow simple data input to customize prints.

Authentication Chip Serial Interfaces 64

These are 2 standard low-speed serial ports, which are connected to the internal chip low speed bus, thereby allowing the CPU to control them. The reason for having 2 ports is to connect to both the on-camera Authentication chip, and to the print-roll Authentication chip using separate lines. Only using 1 line may make it possible for a clone print-roll manufacturer to design a chip which, instead of generating an authentication code, tricks the camera into using the code generated by the authentication chip in the camera.

Parallel Interface 67

The parallel interface connects the ACP 31 to individual static electrical signals. The CPU is able to control each of these connections as memory-mapped I/O via the low speed bus The following table is a list of connections to the parallel interface:

Connection
Direction
Pins

Paper transport stepper motor
Out
4

Artcard stepper motor
Out
4

Zoom stepper motor
Out
4

Guillotine motor
Out
1

Flash trigger
Out
1

Status LCD segment drivers
Out
7

Status LCD common drivers
Out
4

Artcard illumination LED
Out
1

Artcard status LED (red/green)
In
2

Artcard sensor
In
1

Paper pull sensor
In
1

Orientation sensor
In
2

Buttons
In
4

TOTAL
36

VLIW Input and Output FIFOs 78, 79

The VLIW Input and Output FIFOs are 8 bit wide FIFOs used for communicating between processes and the VLIW Vector Processor 74. Both FIFOs are under the control of the VLIW Vector Processor 74, but can be cleared and queried (e.g. for status) etc by the CPU.

VLIW Input FIFO 78

A client writes 8-bit data to the VLIW Input FIFO 78 in order to have the data processed by the VLIW Vector Processor 74. Clients include the Image Sensor Interface, Artcard Interface, and CPU. Each of these processes is able to offload processing by simply writing the data to the FIFO, and letting the VLIW Vector Processor 74 do all the hard work. An example of the use of a client's use of the VLIW Input FIFO 78 is the Image Sensor Interface (ISI 83). The ISI 83 takes data from the Image Sensor and writes it to the FIFO. A VLIW process takes it from the FIFO, transforming it into the correct image data format, and writing it out to DRAM. The ISI 83 becomes much simpler as a result.

VLIW Output FIFO 79

The VLIW Vector Processor 74 writes 8-bit data to the VLIW Output FIFO 79 where clients can read it. Clients include the Print Head Interface and the CPU. Both of these clients is able to offload processing by simply reading the already processed data from the FIFO, and letting the VLIW Vector Processor 74 do all the hard work. The CPU can also be interrupted whenever data is placed into the VLIW Output FIFO 79, allowing it to only process the data as it becomes available rather than polling the FIFO continuously. An example of the use of a client's use of the VLIW Output FIFO 79 is the Print Head Interface (PHI 62). A VLIW process takes an image, rotates it to the correct orientation, color converts it, and dithers the resulting image according to the print head requirements. The PHI 62 reads the dithered formatted 8-bit data from the VLIW Output FIFO 79 and simply passes it on to the Print Head external to the ACP 31. The PHI 62 becomes much simpler as a result.

VLIW Vector Processor 74

To achieve the high processing requirements of Artcam, the ACP 31 contains a VLIW (Very Long Instruction Word) Vector Processor. The VLIW processor is a set of 4 identical Processing Units (PU e.g 178) working in parallel, connected by a crossbar switch 183. Each PU e.g 178 can perform four 8-bit multiplications, eight 8-bit additions, three 32-bit additions, I/O processing, and various logical operations in each cycle. The PUs e.g 178 are microcoded, and each has two Address Generators 189, 190 to allow full use of available cycles for data processing. The four PUs e.g 178 are normally synchronized to provide a tightly interacting VLIW processor. Clocking at 200 MHz, the VLIW Vector Processor 74 runs at 12 Gops (12 billion operations per second). Instructions are tuned for image processing functions such as warping, artistic brushing, complex synthetic illumination, color transforms, image filtering, and compositing. These are accelerated by two orders of magnitude over desktop computers.

As shown in more detail in FIG. 3A, the VLIW Vector Processor 74 is 4 PUs e.g 178 connected by a crossbar switch 183 such that each PU e.g 178 provides two inputs to, and takes two outputs from, the crossbar switch 183. Two common registers form a control and synchronization mechanism for the PUs e.g 178. 8 Cache buses 182 allow connectivity to DRAM via the Data cache 76, with 2 buses going to each PU e.g 178 (1 bus per I/O Address Generator).

Each PU e.g 178 consists of an ALU 188 (containing a number of registers & some arithmetic logic for processing data), some microcode RAM 196, and connections to the outside world (including other ALUs). A local PU state machine runs in microcode and is the means by which the PU e.g 178 is controlled. Each PU e.g 178 contains two I/O Address Generators 189, 190 controlling data flow between DRAM (via the Data cache 76) and the ALU 188 (via Input FIFO and Output FIFO). The address generator is able to read and write data (specifically images in a variety of formats) as well as tables and simulated FIFOs in DRAM. The formats are customizable under software control, but are not microcoded. Data taken from the Data cache 76 is transferred to the ALU 188 via the 16-bit wide Input FIFO. Output data is written to the 16-bit wide Output FIFO and from there to the Data cache 76. Finally, all PUs e.g 178 share a single 8-bit wide VLIW Input FIFO 78 and a single 8-bit wide VLIW Output FIFO 79. The low speed data bus connection allows the CPU to read and write registers in the PU e.g 178, update microcode, as well as the common registers shared by all PUs e.g 178 in the VLIW Vector Processor 74. Turning now to FIG. 4, a closer detail of the internals of a single PU e.g 178 can be seen, with components and control signals detailed in subsequent hereinafter:

Microcode

Each PU e.g 178 contains a microcode RAM 196 to hold the program for that particular PU e.g 178. Rather than have the microcode in ROM, the microcode is in RAM, with the CPU responsible for loading it up. For the same space on chip, this tradeoff reduces the maximum size of any one function to the size of the RAM, but allows an unlimited number of functions to be written in microcode. Functions implemented using microcode include Vark acceleration, Artcard reading, and Printing. The VLIW Vector Processor 74 scheme has several advantages for the case of the ACP 31:

- Hardware design complexity is reduced
- Hardware risk is reduced due to reduction in complexity
- Hardware design time does not depend on all Vark functionality being implemented in dedicated silicon
- Space on chip is reduced overall (due to large number of processes able to be implemented as microcode)
- Functionality can be added to Vark (via microcode) with no impact on hardware design time
  
  Size and Content

The CPU loaded microcode RAM 196 for controlling each PU e.g 178 is 128 words, with each word being 96 bits wide. A summary of the microcode size for control of various units of the PU e.g 178 is listed in the following table:

Process Block
Size (bits)

Status Output
3

Branching (microcode control)
11

In
8

Out
6

Registers
7

Read
10

Write
6

Barrel Shifter
12

Adder/Logical
14

Multiply/Interpolate
19

TOTAL
96

With 128 instruction words, the total microcode RAM 196 per PU e.g 178 is 12,288 bits, or 1.5 KB exactly. Since the VLIW Vector Processor 74 consists of 4 identical PUs e.g 178 this equates to 6,144 bytes, exactly 6 KB. Some of the bits in a microcode word are directly used as control bits, while others are decoded. See the various unit descriptions that detail the interpretation of each of the bits of the microcode word.

Synchronization Between PUs e.g 178

Each PU e.g 178 contains a 4 bit Synchronization Register 197. It is a mask used to determine which PUs e.g 178 work together, and has one bit set for each of the corresponding PUs e.g 178 that are functioning as a single process. For example, if all of the PUs e.g 178 were functioning as a single process, each of the 4 Synchronization Register 197s would have all 4 bits set. If there were two asynchronous processes of 2 PUs e.g 178 each, two of the PUs e.g 178 would have 2 bits set in their Synchronization Register 197s (corresponding to themselves), and the other two would have the other 2 bits set in their Synchronization Register 197s (corresponding to themselves).

The Synchronization Register 197 is used in two basic ways:

- Stopping and starting a given process in synchrony
- Suspending execution within a process
  
  Stopping and Starting Processes

The CPU is responsible for loading the microcode RAM 196 and loading the execution address for the first instruction (usually 0). When the CPU starts executing microcode, it begins at the specified address.

Execution of microcode only occurs when all the bits of the Synchronization Register 197 are also set in the Common Synchronization Register 197. The CPU therefore sets up all the PUs e.g 178 and then starts or stops processes with a single write to the Common Synchronization Register 197.

This synchronization scheme allows multiple processes to be running asynchronously on the PUs e.g 178, being stopped and started as processes rather than one PU e.g 178 at a time.

Suspending Execution within a Process

In a given cycle, a PU e.g 178 may need to read from or write to a FIFO (based on the opcode of the current microcode instruction). If the FIFO is empty on a read request, or full on a write request, the FIFO request cannot be completed. The PU e.g 178 will therefore assert its SuspendProcess control signal 198. The SuspendProcess signals from all PUs e.g 178 are fed back to all the PUs e.g 178.

The Synchronization Register 197 is ANDed with the 4 SuspendProcess bits, and if the result is non-zero, none of the PU e.g 178's register WriteEnables or FIFO strobes will be set. Consequently none of the PUs e.g 178 that form the same process group as the PU e.g 178 that was unable to complete its task will have their registers or FIFOs updated during that cycle. This simple technique keeps a given process group in synchronization. Each subsequent cycle the PU e.g 178's state machine will attempt to re-execute the microcode instruction at the same address, and will continue to do so until successful. Of course the Common Synchronization Register 197 can be written to by the CPU to stop the entire process if necessary. This synchronization scheme allows any combinations of PUs e.g 178 to work together, each group only affecting its co-workers with regards to suspension due to data not being ready for reading or writing.

Control and Branching

During each cycle, each of the four basic input and calculation units within a PU e.g 178's ALU 188 (Read, Adder/Logic, Multiply/Interpolate, and Barrel Shifter) produces two status bits: a Zero flag and a Negative flag indicating whether the result of the operation during that cycle was 0 or negative. Each cycle one of those 4 status bits is chosen by microcode instructions to be output from the PU e.g 178. The 4 status bits (1 per PU e.g 178's ALU 188) are combined into a 4 bit Common Status Register 200. During the next cycle, each PU e.g 178's microcode program can select one of the bits from the Common Status Register 200, and branch to another microcode address dependant on the value of the status bit.

Status Bit

Each PU e.g 178's ALU 188 contains a number of input and calculation units. Each unit produces 2 status bits—a negative flag and a zero flag. One of these status bits is output from the PU e.g 178 when a particular unit asserts the value on the 1-bit tri-state status bit bus. The single status bit is output from the PU e.g 178, and then combined with the other PU e.g 178 status bits to update the Common Status Register 200. The microcode for determining the output status bit takes the following form:

# Bits
Description

2
Select unit whose status bit is to be output

00 = Adder unit

01 = Multiply/Logic unit

10 = Barrel Shift unit

11 = Reader unit

1
0 = Zero flag

1 = Negative flag

3
TOTAL

Within the ALU 188, the 2-bit Select Processor Block value is decoded into four 1-bit enable bits, with a different enable bit sent to each processor unit block. The status select bit (choosing Zero or Negative) is passed into all units to determine which bit is to be output onto the status bit bus.

Branching within Microcode

Each PU e.g 178 contains a 7 bit Program Counter (PC) that holds the current microcode address being executed. Normal program execution is linear, moving from address N in one cycle to address N+1 in the next cycle. Every cycle however, a microcode program has the ability to branch to a different location, or to test a status bit from the Common Status Register 200 and branch. The microcode for determining the next execution address takes the following form:

# Bits
Description

2
00 = NOP (PC = PC + 1)

01 = Branch always

10 = Branch if status bit clear

11 = Branch if status bit set

2
Select status bit from status word

7
Address to branch to (absolute address,

00-7F)

11
TOTAL

ALU 188
FIG. 5 illustrates the ALU 188 in more detail. Inside the ALU 188 are a number of specialized processing blocks, controlled by a microcode program. The specialized processing blocks include:

- Read Block 202, for accepting data from the input FIFOs
- Write Block 203, for sending data out via the output FIFOs
- Adder/Logical block 204, for addition & subtraction, comparisons and logical operations
- Multiply/Interpolate block 205, for multiple types of interpolations and multiply/accumulates
- Barrel Shift block 206, for shifting data as required
- In block 207, for accepting data from the external crossbar switch 183
- Out block 208, for sending data to the external crossbar switch 183
- Registers block 215, for holding data in temporary storage
  
  Four specialized 32 bit registers hold the results of the 4 main processing blocks:
- M register 209 holds the result of the Multiply/Interpolate block
- L register 209 holds the result of the Adder/Logic block
- S register 209 holds the result of the Barrel Shifter block
- R register 209 holds the result of the Read Block 202

In addition there are two internal crossbar switches 213m 214 for data transport. The various process blocks are further expanded in the following sections, together with the microcode definitions that pertain to each block. Note that the microcode is decoded within a block to provide the control signals to the various units within.

Data Transfers Between Pus e.g 178

Each PU e.g 178 is able to exchange data via the external crossbar. A PU e.g 178 takes two inputs and outputs two values to the external crossbar. In this way two operands for processing can be obtained in a single cycle, but cannot be actually used in an operation until the following cycle.

In 207

This block is illustrated in FIG. 6 and contains two registers, In₁and In₂that accept data from the external crossbar. The registers can be loaded each cycle, or can remain unchanged. The selection bits for choosing from among the 8 inputs are output to the external crossbar switch 183. The microcode takes the following form:

# Bits
Description

1
0 = NOP

1 = Load In₁from crossbar

3
Select Input 1 from external crossbar

1
0 = NOP

1 = Load In₂from crossbar

3
Select Input 2 from external crossbar

8
TOTAL

Out 208

Complementing In is Out 208. The Out block is illustrated in more detail in FIG. 7. Out contains two registers, Out₁and Out₂, both of which are output to the external crossbar each cycle for use by other PUs e.g 178. The Write unit is also able to write one of Out₁or Out₂to one of the output FIFOs attached to the ALU 188. Finally, both registers are available as inputs to Crossbar1213, which therefore makes the register values available as inputs to other units within the ALU 188. Each cycle either of the two registers can be updated according to microcode selection. The data loaded into the specified register can be one of D₀-D₃(selected from Crossbar1213) one of M, L, S, and R (selected from Crossbar2214), one of 2 programmable constants, or the fixed values 0 or 1. The microcode for Out takes the following form:

# Bits
Description

1
0 = NOP

1 = Load Register

1
Select Register to load [Out₁or Out₂]

4
Select input

[In₁, In₂, Out₁, Out₂, D₀, D₁, D₂, D₃, M, L, S, R, K₁, K₂, 0, 1]

6
TOTAL

Local Registers and Data Transfers within ALU 188

As noted previously, the ALU 188 contains four specialized 32-bit registers to hold the results of the 4 main processing blocks:

- M register 209 holds the result of the Multiply/Interpolate block
- L register 209 holds the result of the Adder/Logic block
- S register 209 holds the result of the Barrel Shifter block
- R register 209 holds the result of the Read Block 202

The CPU has direct access to these registers, and other units can select them as inputs via Crossbar2214. Sometimes it is necessary to delay an operation for one or more cycles. The Registers block contains four 32-bit registers D₀-D₃to hold temporary variables during processing. Each cycle one of the registers can be updated, while all the registers are output for other units to use via Crossbar1213 (which also includes In₁, In₂, Out₁and Out₂). The CPU has direct access to these registers. The data loaded into the specified register can be one of D₀-D₃(selected from Crossbar1213) one of M, L, S, and R (selected from Crossbar2214), one of 2 programmable constants, or the fixed values 0 or 1. The Registers block 215 is illustrated in more detail in FIG. 8. The microcode for Registers takes the following form:

# Bits
Description

1
0 = NOP

1 = Load Register

2
Select Register to load [D₀− D₃]

4
Select input

[In₁, In₂, Out₁, Out₂, D₀, D₁, D₂, D₃, M, L, S, R, K₁, K₂, 0, 1]

7
TOTAL

Crossbar1213

Crossbar1213 is illustrated in more detail in FIG. 9. Crossbar1213 is used to select from inputs In₁, In₂, Out₁, Out₂, D₀-D₃. 7 outputs are generated from Crossbar1213: 3 to the Multiply/Interpolate Unit, 2 to the Adder Unit, 1 to the Registers unit and 1 to the Out unit. The control signals for Crossbar1213 come from the various units that use the Crossbar inputs. There is no specific microcode that is separate for Crossbar1213.

Crossbar2214

Crossbar2214 is illustrated in more detail in FIG. 10. Crossbar2214 is used to select from the general ALU 188 registers M, L, S and R. 6 outputs are generated from Crossbar1213: 2 to the Multiply/Interpolate Unit, 2 to the Adder Unit, 1 to the Registers unit and 1 to the Out unit. The control signals for Crossbar2214 come from the various units that use the Crossbar inputs. There is no specific microcode that is separate for Crossbar2214.

Data Transfers Between PUs e.g 178 and DRAM or External Processes

Returning to FIG. 4, PUs e.g 178 share data with each other directly via the external crossbar. They also transfer data to and from external processes as well as DRAM. Each PU e.g 178 has 2 I/O Address Generators 189, 190 for transferring data to and from DRAM. A PU e.g 178 can send data to DRAM via an I/O Address Generator's Output FIFO e.g. 186, or accept data from DRAM via an I/O Address Generator's Input FIFO 187. These FIFOs are local to the PU e.g 178. There is also a mechanism for transferring data to and from external processes in the form of a common VLIW Input FIFO 78 and a common VLIW Output FIFO 79, shared between all ALUs. The VLIW Input and Output FIFOs are only 8 bits wide, and are used for printing, Artcard reading, transferring data to the CPU etc. The local Input and Output FIFOs are 16 bits wide.

Read

The Read process block 202 of FIG. 5 is responsible for updating the ALU 188's R register 209, which represents the external input data to a VLIW microcoded process. Each cycle the Read Unit is able to read from either the common VLIW Input FIFO 78 (8 bits) or one of two local Input FIFOs (16 bits). A 32-bit value is generated, and then all or part of that data is transferred to the R register 209. The process can be seen in FIG. 11. The microcode for Read is described in the following table. Note that the interpretations of some bit patterns are deliberately chosen to aid decoding.

# Bits
Description

2
00 = NOP

01 = Read from VLIW Input FIFO 78

10 = Read from Local FIFO 1

11 = Read from Local FIFO 2

1
How many significant bits

0 = 8 bits (pad with 0 or sign extend)

1 = 16 bits (only valid for Local FIFO reads)

1
0 = Treat data as unsigned (pad with 0)

1 = Treat data as signed (sign extend when reading

from FIFO)r

2
How much to shift data left by:

00 = 0 bits (no change)

01 = 8 bits

10 = 16 bits

11 = 24 bits

4
Which bytes of R to update (hi to lo order byte)

Each of the 4 bits represents 1 byte WriteEnable on R

10
TOTAL

Write

The Write process block is able to write to either the common VLIW Output FIFO 79 or one of the two local Output FIFOs each cycle. Note that since only 1 FIFO is written to in a given cycle, only one 16-bit value is output to all FIFOs, with the low 8 bits going to the VLIW Output FIFO 79. The microcode controls which of the FIFOs gates in the value. The process of data selection can be seen in more detail in FIG. 12. The source values Out₁and Out₂come from the Out block. They are simply two registers. The microcode for Write takes the following form:

# Bits
Description

2
00 = NOP

01 = Write VLIW Output FIFO 79

10 = Write local Output FIFO 1

11 = Write local Output FIFO 2

1
Select Output Value [Out₁or Out₂]

3
Select part of Output Value to write (32 bits = 4 bytes ABCD)

000 = 0D

001 = 0D

010 = 0B

011 = 0A

100 = CD

101 = BC

110 = AB

111 = 0

6
TOTAL

Computational Blocks

Each ALU 188 has two computational process blocks, namely an Adder/Logic process block 204, and a Multiply/Interpolate process block 205. In addition there is a Barrel Shifter block to provide help to these computational blocks. Registers from the Registers block 215 can be used for temporary storage during pipelined operations.

Barrel Shifter

The Barrel Shifter process block 206 is shown in more detail in FIG. 13 and takes its input from the output of Adder/Logic or Multiply/Interpolate process blocks or the previous cycle's results from those blocks (ALU registers L and M). The 32 bits selected are barrel shifted an arbitrary number of bits in either direction (with sign extension as necessary), and output to the ALU 188's S register 209. The microcode for the Barrel Shift process block is described in the following table. Note that the interpretations of some bit patterns are deliberately chosen to aid decoding.

# Bits
Description

3
000 = NOP

001 = Shift Left (unsigned)

010 = Reserved

011 = Shift Left (signed)

100 = Shift right (unsigned, no rounding)

101 = Shift right (unsigned, with rounding)

110 = Shift right (signed, no rounding)

111 = Shift right (signed, with rounding)

2
Select Input to barrel shift:

00 = Multiply/Interpolate result

01 = M

10 = Adder/Logic result

11 = L

5
# bits to shift

1
Ceiling of 255

1
Floor of 0 (signed data)

12
TOTAL

Adder/Logic 204

The Adder/Logic process block is shown in more detail in FIG. 14 and is designed for simple 32-bit addition/subtraction, comparisons, and logical operations. In a single cycle a single addition, comparison, or logical operation can be performed, with the result stored in the ALU 188's L register 209. There are two primary operands, A and B, which are selected from either of the two crossbars or from the 4 constant registers. One crossbar selection allows the results of the previous cycle's arithmetic operation to be used while the second provides access to operands previously calculated by this or another ALU 188. The CPU is the only unit that has write access to the four constants (K₁-K₄). In cases where an operation such as (A+B)×4 is desired, the direct output from the adder can be used as input to the Barrel Shifter, and can thus be shifted left 2 places without needing to be latched into the L register 209 first. The output from the adder can also be made available to the multiply unit for a multiply-accumulate operation. The microcode for the Adder/Logic process block is described in the following table. The interpretations of some bit patterns are deliberately chosen to aid decoding. Microcode bit interpretation for Adder/Logic unit

# Bits
Description

4
0000 = A + B (carry in = 0)

0001 = A + B (carry in = carry out of previous operation)

0010 = A + B + 1 (carry in = 1)

0011 = A + 1 (increments A)

0100 = A − B − 1 (carry in = 0)

0101 = A − B (carry in = carry out of previous operation)

0110 = A − B (carry in = 1)

0111 = A − 1 (decrements A)

1000 = NOP

1001 = ABS(A − B)

1010 = MIN(A, B)

1011 = MAX(A, B)

1100 = A AND B (both A & B can be inverted, see below)

1101 = A OR B (both A & B can be inverted, see below)

1110 = A XOR B (both A & B can be inverted, see below)

1111 = A (A can be inverted, see below)

1
If logical operation:

0 = A = A

1 = A = NOT(A)

If Adder operation:

0 = A is unsigned

1 = A is signed

1
If logical operation:

0 = B = B

1 = B = NOT(B)

If Adder operation

0 = B is unsigned

1 = B is signed

4
Select A

[In₁, In₂, Out₁, Out₂, D₀, D₁, D₂, D₃, M, L, S, R, K₁, K₂,

K₃, K₄]

4
Select B

[In₁, In₂, Out₁, Out₂, D₀, D₁, D₂, D₃, M, L, S, R, K₁, K₂,

K₃, K₄]

14
TOTAL

Multiply/Interpolate 205

The Multiply/Interpolate process block is shown in more detail in FIG. 15 and is a set of four 8×8 interpolator units that are capable of performing four individual 8×8 interpolates per cycle, or can be combined to perform a single 16×16 multiply. This gives the possibility to perform up to 4 linear interpolations, a single bi-linear interpolation, or half of a tri-linear interpolation in a single cycle. The result of the interpolations or multiplication is stored in the ALU 188's M register 209. There are two primary operands, A and B, which are selected from any of the general registers in the ALU 188 or from four programmable constants internal to the Multiply/Interpolate process block. Each interpolator block functions as a simple 8 bit interpolator [result=A+(B−A)f] or as a simple 8×8 multiply [result=A*B]. When the operation is interpolation, A and B are treated as four 8 bit numbers A₀thru A₃(A₀is the low order byte), and B₀thru B₃. Agen, Bgen, and Fgen are responsible for ordering the inputs to the Interpolate units so that they match the operation being performed. For example, to perform bilinear interpolation, each of the 4 values must be multiplied by a different factor & the result summed, while a 16×16 bit multiplication requires the factors to be 0. The microcode for the Adder/Logic process block is described in the following table. Note that the interpretations of some bit patterns are deliberately chosen to aid decoding.

# Bits
Description

4
0000 = (A₁₀* B₁₀) + V

0001 = (A0 * B0) + (A1 * B1) + V

0010 = (A₁₀* B₁₀) − V

0011 = V − (A₁₀* B₁₀)

0100 = Interpolate A₀, B₀by f₀

0101 = Interpolate A₀, B₀by f₀, A₁, B₁by f₁

0110 = Interpolate A₀, B₀by f₀, A₁, B₁by f₁, A₂, B₂by f₂

0111 = Interpolate A₀, B₀by f₀, A₁, B₁by f₁, A₂, B₂by f₂, A₃,

B₃by f₃

1000 = Interpolate 16 bits stage 1 [M = A₁₀* f₁₀]

1001 = Interpolate 16 bits stage 2 [M = M + (A₁₀* f₁₀)]

1010 = Tri-linear interpolate A by f stage 1

[M = A₀f₀+ A₁f₁+ A₂f₂+ A₃f₃]

1011 = Tri-linear interpolate A by f stage 2

[M = M + A₀f₀+ A₁f₁+ A₂f₂+ A₃f₃]

1100 = Bi-linear interpolate A by f stage 1 [M = A₀f₀+ A₁f₁]

1101 = Bi-linear interpolate A by f stage 2 [M = M + A₀f₀+

A₁f₁]

1110 = Bi-linear interpolate A by f complete

[M = A₀f₀+ A₁f₁+ A₂f₂+ A₃f₃]

1111 = NOP

4
Select A [In₁, In₂, Out₁, Out₂, D₀, D₁, D₂, D₃, M, L, S, R, K₁,

K₂, K₃, K₄]

4
Select B [In₁, In₂, Out₁, Out₂, D₀, D₁, D₂, D₃, M, L, S, R, K₁,

K₂, K₃, K₄]

If

Mult:

4
Select V [In₁, In₂, Out₁, Out₂, D₀, D₁, D₂, D₃, K₁, K₂, K₃, K₄,

Adder result, M, 0, 1]

1
Treat A as signed

1
Treat B as signed

1
Treat V as signed

If

Interp:

4
Select basis for f

[In₁, In₂, Out₁, Out₂, D₀, D₁, D₂, D₃, K₁, K₂, K₃, K₄, X, X,

X, X]

1
Select interpolation f generation from P₁or P₂

P_nis interpreted as # fractional bits in f

If P_n= 0, f is range 0 . . . 255 representing 0 . . . 1

2
Reserved

19
TOTAL

The same 4 bits are used for the selection of V and f, although the last 4 options for V don't generally make sense as f values. Interpolating with a factor of 1 or 0 is pointless, and the previous multiplication or current result is unlikely to be a meaningful value for f.

I/O Address Generators 189, 190

The I/O Address Generators are shown in more detail in FIG. 16. A VLIW process does not access DRAM directly. Access is via 2 I/O Address Generators 189, 190, each with its own Input and Output FIFO. A PU e.g 178 reads data from one of two local Input FIFOs, and writes data to one of two local Output FIFOs. Each I/O Address Generator is responsible for reading data from DRAM and placing it into its Input FIFO, where it can be read by the PU e.g 178, and is responsible for taking the data from its Output FIFO (placed there by the PU e.g 178) and writing it to DRAM. The I/O Address Generator is a state machine responsible for generating addresses and control for data retrieval and storage in DRAM via the Data cache 76. It is customizable under CPU software control, but cannot be microcoded. The address generator produces addresses in two broad categories:

- Image Iterators, used to iterate (reading, writing or both) through pixels of an image in a variety of ways
- Table I/O, used to randomly access pixels in images, data in tables, and to simulate FIFOs in DRAM

Each of the I/O Address Generators 189, 190 has its own bus connection to the Data cache 76, making 2 bus connections per PU e.g 178, and a total of 8 buses over the entire VLIW Vector Processor 74. The Data cache 76 is able to service 4 of the maximum 8 requests from the 4 PUs e.g 178 each cycle. The Input and Output FIFOs are 8 entry deep 16-bit wide FIFOs. The various types of address generation (Image Iterators and Table I/0) are described in the subsequent sections.

Registers

The I/O Address Generator has a set of registers for that are used to control address generation. The addressing mode also determines how the data is formatted and sent into the local Input FIFO, and how data is interpreted from the local Output FIFO. The CPU is able to access the registers of the I/O Address Generator via the low speed bus. The first set of registers define the housekeeping parameters for the I/O Generator:

Register Name
# bits
Description

Reset
0
A write to this register halts any operations,

and writes 0s to all the data registers of the

I/O Generator. The input and output FIFOs

are not cleared.

Go
0
A write to this register restarts the counters

according to the current setup. For example,

if the I/O Generator is a Read Iterator, and

the Iterator is currently halfway through the

image, a write to Go will cause the reading

to begin at the start of the image again.

While the I/O Generator is performing, the

Active bit of the Status register will be set.

Halt
0
A write to this register stops any current

activity and clears the Active bit of the Status

register. If the Active bit is already cleared,

writing to this register has no effect.

Continue
0
A write to this register continues the I/O

Generator from the current setup. Counters

are not reset, and FIFOs are not cleared.

A write to this register while the I/O

Generator is active has no effect.

ClearFIFOsOnGo
1
0 = Don't clear FIFOs on a write to the Go bit.

1 = Do clear FIFOs on a write to the Go bit.

Status
8
Status flags

The Status register has the following values

Caching

Several registers are used to control the caching mechanism, specifying which cache group to use for inputs, outputs etc. See the section on the Data cache 76 for more information about cache groups.

Register Name
# bits
Description

CacheGroup1
4
Defines cache group to read data from

CacheGroup2
4
Defines which cache group to write data to, and in

the case of the ImagePyramidLookup I/O mode,

defines the cache to use for reading the Level

Information Table.

Image Iterators=Sequential Automatic Access to Pixels

The primary image pixel access method for software and hardware algorithms is via Image Iterators. Image iterators perform all of the addressing and access to the caches of the pixels within an image channel and read, write or read & write pixels for their client. Read Iterators read pixels in a specific order for their clients, and Write Iterators write pixels in a specific order for their clients. Clients of Iterators read pixels from the local Input FIFO or write pixels via the local Output FIFO.

Read Image Iterators read through an image in a specific order, placing the pixel data into the local Input FIFO. Every time a client reads a pixel from the Input FIFO, the Read Iterator places the next pixel from the image (via the Data cache 76) into the FIFO.

Write Image Iterators write pixels in a specific order to write out the entire image. Clients write pixels to the Output FIFO that is in turn read by the Write Image Iterator and written to DRAM via the Data cache 76.

Typically a VLIW process will have its input tied to a Read Iterator, and output tied to a corresponding Write Iterator. From the PU e.g 178 microcode program's perspective, the FIFO is the effective interface to DRAM. The actual method of carrying out the storage (apart from the logical ordering of the data) is not of concern. Although the FIFO is perceived to be effectively unlimited in length, in practice the FIFO is of limited length, and there can be delays storing and retrieving data, especially if several memory accesses are competing. A variety of Image Iterators exist to cope with the most common addressing requirements of image processing algorithms. In most cases there is a corresponding Write Iterator for each Read Iterator. The different Iterators are listed in the following table:

Read Iterators
Write Iterators

Sequential Read
Sequential Write

Box Read
—

Vertical Strip Read
Vertical Strip Write

The 4 bit Address Mode Register is used to determine the Iterator type:

Bit #
Address Mode

3
0 = This addressing mode is an Iterator

2 to 0
Iterator Mode

001 = Sequential Iterator

010 = Box [read only]

100 = Vertical Strip

remaining bit patterns are reserved

The Access Specific registers are used as follows:

Register Name
LocalName
Description

AccessSpecific₁
Flags
Flags used for reading and writing

AccessSpecific₂
XBoxSize
Determines the size in X of Box Read. Valid

values are 3, 5, and 7.

AccessSpecific₃
YBoxSize
Determines the size in Y of Box Read. Valid

values are 3, 5, and 7.

AccessSpecific₄
BoxOffset
Offset between one pixel center and the next

during a Box Read only.

Usual value is 1, but other useful values

include 2, 4, 8 . . . See Box Read for more

details.

The Flags register (AccessSpecific₁) contains a number of flags used to determine factors affecting the reading and writing of data. The Flags register has the following composition:

Label
#bits
Description

ReadEnable
1
Read data from DRAM

WriteEnable
1
Write data to DRAM [not valid for Box mode]

PassX
1
Pass X (pixel) ordinate back to Input FIFO

PassY
1
Pass Y (row) ordinate back to Input FIFO

Loop
1
0 = Do not loop through data

1 = Loop through data

Reserved
11
Must be 0

Notes on ReadEnable and WriteEnable:

- When ReadEnable is set, the I/O Address Generator acts as a Read Iterator, and therefore reads the image in a particular order, placing the pixels into the Input FIFO.
- When WriteEnable is set, the I/O Address Generator acts as a Write Iterator, and therefore writes the image in a particular order, taking the pixels from the Output FIFO.
- When both ReadEnable and WriteEnable are set, the I/O Address Generator acts as a Read Iterator and as a Write Iterator, reading pixels into the Input FIFO, and writing pixels from the Output FIFO. Pixels are only written after they have been read—i.e. the Write Iterator will never go faster than the Read Iterator. Whenever this mode is used, care should be taken to ensure balance between in and out processing by the VLIW microcode. Note that separate cache groups can be specified on reads and writes by loading different values in CacheGroup 1 and CacheGroup2.
  
  Notes on PassX and PassY:
- If PassX and PassY are both set, the Y ordinate is placed into the Input FIFO before the X ordinate.
- PassX and PassY are only intended to be set when the ReadEnable bit is clear. Instead of passing the ordinates to the address generator, the ordinates are placed directly into the Input FIFO. The ordinates advance as they are removed from the FIFO.
- If WriteEnable bit is set, the VLIW program must ensure that it balances reads of ordinates from the Input FIFO with writes to the Output FIFO, as writes will only occur up to the ordinates (see note on ReadEnable and WriteEnable above).
  
  Notes on Loop:
- If the Loop bit is set, reads will recommence at [StartPixel, StartRow] once it has reached [EndPixel, EndRow]. This is ideal for processing a structure such a convolution kernel or a dither cell matrix, where the data must be read repeatedly.
- Looping with ReadEnable and WriteEnable set can be useful in an environment keeping a single line history, but only where it is useful to have reading occur before writing. For a FIFO effect (where writing occurs before reading in a length constrained fashion), use an appropriate Table I/O addressing mode instead of an Image Iterator.
- Looping with only WriteEnable set creates a written window of the last N pixels. This can be used with an asynchronous process that reads the data from the window. The Artcard Reading algorithm makes use of this mode.
  
  Sequential Read and Write Iterators

FIG. 17 illustrates the pixel data format. The simplest Image Iterators are the Sequential Read Iterator and corresponding Sequential Write Iterator. The Sequential Read Iterator presents the pixels from a channel one line at a time from top to bottom, and within a line, pixels are presented left to right. The padding bytes are not presented to the client. It is most useful for algorithms that must perform some process on each pixel from an image but don't care about the order of the pixels being processed, or want the data specifically in this order. Complementing the Sequential Read Iterator is the Sequential Write Iterator. Clients write pixels to the Output FIFO. A Sequential Write Iterator subsequently writes out a valid image using appropriate caching and appropriate padding bytes. Each Sequential Iterator requires access to 2 cache lines. When reading, while 32 pixels are presented from one cache line, the other cache line can be loaded from memory. When writing, while 32 pixels are being filled up in one cache line, the other can be being written to memory. A process that performs an operation on each pixel of an image independently would typically use a Sequential Read Iterator to obtain pixels, and a Sequential Write Iterator to write the new pixel values to their corresponding locations within the destination image. Such a process is shown in FIG. 18.

In most cases, the source and destination images are different, and are represented by 2 I/O Address Generators 189, 190. However it can be valid to have the source image and destination image to be the same, since a given input pixel is not read more than once. In that case, then the same Iterator can be used for both input and output, with both the ReadEnable and WriteEnable registers set appropriately. For maximum efficiency, 2 different cache groups should be used—one for reading and the other for writing. If data is being created by a VLIW process to be written via a Sequential Write Iterator, the PassX and PassY flags can be used to generate coordinates that are then passed down the Input FIFO. The VLIW process can use these coordinates and create the output data appropriately.

Box Read Iterator

The Box Read Iterator is used to present pixels in an order most useful for performing operations such as general-purpose filters and convolve. The Iterator presents pixel values in a square box around the sequentially read pixels. The box is limited to being 1, 3, 5, or 7 pixels wide in X and Y (set XBoxSize and YBoxSize—they must be the same value or 1 in one dimension and 3, 5, or 7 in the other). The process is shown in FIG. 19:

BoxOffset: This special purpose register is used to determine a sub-sampling in terms of which input pixels will be used as the center of the box. The usual value is 1, which means that each pixel is used as the center of the box. The value “2” would be useful in scaling an image down by 4:1 as in the case of building an image pyramid. Using pixel addresses from the previous diagram, the box would be centered on pixel 0, then 2, 8, and 10. The Box Read Iterator requires access to a maximum of 14 (2×7) cache lines. While pixels are presented from one set of 7 lines, the other cache lines can be loaded from memory.

Box Write Iterator

There is no corresponding Box Write Iterator, since the duplication of pixels is only required on input. A process that uses the Box Read Iterator for input would most likely use the Sequential Write Iterator for output since they are in sync. A good example is the convolver, where N input pixels are read to calculate 1 output pixel. The process flow is as illustrated in FIG. 20. The source and destination images should not occupy the same memory when using a Box Read Iterator, as subsequent lines of an image require the original (not newly calculated) values.

Vertical-Strip Read and Write Iterators

In some instances it is necessary to write an image in output pixel order, but there is no knowledge about the direction of coherence in input pixels in relation to output pixels. An example of this is rotation. If an image is rotated 90 degrees, and we process the output pixels horizontally, there is a complete loss of cache coherence. On the other hand, if we process the output image one cache line's width of pixels at a time and then advance to the next line (rather than advance to the next cache-line's worth of pixels on the same line), we will gain cache coherence for our input image pixels. It can also be the case that there is known ‘block’ coherence in the input pixels (such as color coherence), in which case the read governs the processing order, and the write, to be synchronized, must follow the same pixel order.

The order of pixels presented as input (Vertical-Strip Read), or expected for output (Vertical-Strip Write) is the same. The order is pixels 0 to 31 from line 0, then pixels 0 to 31 of line 1 etc for all lines of the image, then pixels 32 to 63 of line 0, pixels 32 to 63 of line 1 etc. In the final vertical strip there may not be exactly 32 pixels wide. In this case only the actual pixels in the image are presented or expected as input. This process is illustrated in FIG. 21.

process that requires only a Vertical-Strip Write Iterator will typically have a way of mapping input pixel coordinates given an output pixel coordinate. It would access the input image pixels according to this mapping, and coherence is determined by having sufficient cache lines on the ‘random-access’ reader for the input image. The coordinates will typically be generated by setting the PassX and PassY flags on the VerticalStripWrite Iterator, as shown in the process overview illustrated in FIG. 22.

It is not meaningful to pair a Write Iterator with a Sequential Read Iterator or a Box read Iterator, but a Vertical-Strip Write Iterator does give significant improvements in performance when there is a non trivial mapping between input and output coordinates.

It can be meaningful to pair a Vertical Strip Read Iterator and Vertical Strip Write Iterator. In this case it is possible to assign both to a single ALU 188 if input and output images are the same. If coordinates are required, a further Iterator must be used with PassX and PassY flags set. The Vertical Strip Read/Write Iterator presents pixels to the Input FIFO, and accepts output pixels from the Output FIFO. Appropriate padding bytes will be inserted on the write. Input and output require a minimum of 2 cache lines each for good performance.

Table I/O Addressing Modes

It is often necessary to lookup values in a table (such as an image). Table I/O addressing modes provide this functionality, requiring the client to place the index/es into the Output FIFO. The I/O Address Generator then processes the index/es, looks up the data appropriately, and returns the looked-up values in the Input FIFO for subsequent processing by the VLIW client.

1D, 2D and 3D tables are supported, with particular modes targeted at interpolation. To reduce complexity on the VLIW client side, the index values are treated as fixed-point numbers, with AccessSpecific registers defining the fixed point and therefore which bits should be treated as the integer portion of the index. Data formats are restricted forms of the general Image Characteristics in that the PixelOffset register is ignored, the data is assumed to be contiguous within a row, and can only be 8 or 16 bits (1 or 2 bytes) per data element. The 4 bit Address Mode Register is used to determine the I/O type:

Bit #
Address Mode

3
1 = This addressing mode is Table I/O

2 to 0
000 = 1D Direct Lookup

001 = 1D Interpolate (linear)

010 = DRAM FIFO

011 = Reserved

100 = 2D Interpolate (bi-linear)

101 = Reserved

110 = 3D Interpolate (tri-linear)

111 = Image Pyramid Lookup

The access specific registers are:

Local

Register Name
Name
#bits
Description

AccessSpecific₁
Flags
8
General flags for reading and writing.

See below for more information.

AccessSpecific₂
FractX
8
Number of fractional bits in X index

AccessSpecific₃
FractY
8
Number of fractional bits in Y index

AccessSpecific₄
FractZ
8
Number of fractional bits in Z index

(low 8 bits / next
ZOffset
12 or
See below

12 or 24 bits))

24

FractX, FractY, and FractZ are used to generate addresses based on indexes, and interpret the format of the index in terms of significant bits and integer/fractional components. The various parameters are only defined as required by the number of dimensions in the table being indexed. A 1D table only needs FractX, a 2D table requires FractX and FractY. Each Fract_value consists of the number of fractional bits in the corresponding index. For example, an X index may be in the format 5:3. This would indicate 5 bits of integer, and 3 bits of fraction. FractX would therefore be set to 3. A simple 1D lookup could have the format 8:0, i.e. no fractional component at all. FractX would therefore be 0. ZOffset is only required for 3D lookup and takes on two different interpretations. It is described more fully in the 3D-table lookup section. The Flags register (AccessSpecific₁) contains a number of flags used to determine factors affecting the reading (and in one case, writing) of data. The Flags register has the following composition:

Label
#bits
Description

ReadEnable
1
Read data from DRAM

WriteEnable
1
Write data to DRAM [only valid for 1D direct

lookup]

DataSize
1
0 = 8 bit data

1 = 16 bit data

Reserved
5
Must be 0

With the exception of the 1D Direct Lookup and DRAM FIFO, all Table I/O modes only support reading, and not writing. Therefore the ReadEnable bit will be set and the WriteEnable bit will be clear for all I/O modes other than these two modes. The 1D Direct Lookup supports 3 modes:

- Read only, where the ReadEnable bit is set and the WriteEnable bit is clear
- Write only, where the ReadEnable bit is clear and the WriteEnable bit is clear
- Read-Modify-Write, where both ReadEnable and the WriteEnable bits are set
  
  The different modes are described in the 1D Direct Lookup section below. The DRAM FIFO mode supports only 1 mode:
- Write-Read mode, where both ReadEnable and the WriteEnable bits are set

This mode is described in the DRAM FIFO section below. The DataSize flag determines whether the size of each data elements of the table is 8 or 16 bits. Only the two data sizes are supported. 32 bit elements can be created in either of 2 ways depending on the requirements of the process:

- Reading from 2 16-bit tables simultaneously and combining the result. This is convenient if timing is an issue, but has the disadvantage of consuming 2 I/O Address Generators 189, 190, and each 32-bit element is not readable by the CPU as a 32-bit entity.
- Reading from a 16-bit table twice and combining the result. This is convenient since only 1 lookup is used, although different indexes must be generated and passed into the lookup.
  
  1 Dimensional Structures
  
  Direct Lookup
  
  A direct lookup is a simple indexing into a 1 dimensional lookup table. Clients can choose between 3 access modes by setting appropriate bits in the Flags register:
- Read only
- Write only
- Read-Modify-Write
  
  Read Only

A client passes the fixed-point index X into the Output FIFO, and the 8 or 16-bit value at Table[Int(X)] is returned in the Input FIFO. The fractional component of the index is completely ignored. If the index is out of bounds, the DuplicateEdge flag determines whether the edge pixel or ConstantPixel is returned. The address generation is straightforward:

- If DataSize indicates 8 bits, X is barrel-shifted right FractX bits, and the result is added to the table's base address ImageStart.
- If DataSize indicates 16 bits, X is barrel-shifted right FractX bits, and the result shifted left 1 bit (bit0 becomes 0) is added to the table's base address ImageStart.

The 8 or 16-bit data value at the resultant address is placed into the Input FIFO. Address generation takes 1 cycle, and transferring the requested data from the cache to the Output FIFO also takes 1 cycle (assuming a cache hit). For example, assume we are looking up values in a 256-entry table, where each entry is 16 bits, and the index is a 12 bit fixed-point format of 8:4. FractX should be 4, and DataSize 1. When an index is passed to the lookup, we shift right 4 bits, then add the result shifted left 1 bit to ImageStart.

Write Only

A client passes the fixed-point index X into the Output FIFO followed by the 8 or 16-bit value that is to be written to the specified location in the table. A complete transfer takes a minimum of 2 cycles. 1 cycle for address generation, and 1 cycle to transfer the data from the FIFO to DRAM. There can be an arbitrary number of cycles between a VLIW process placing the index into the FIFO and placing the value to be written into the FIFO. Address generation occurs in the same way as Read Only mode, but instead of the data being read from the address, the data from the Output FIFO is written to the address. If the address is outside the table range, the data is removed from the FIFO but not written to DRAM.

Read-Modify-Write

A client passes the fixed-point index X into the Output FIFO, and the 8 or 16-bit value at Table[Int(X)] is returned in the Input FIFO. The next value placed into the Output FIFO is then written to Table[Int(X)], replacing the value that had been returned earlier. The general processing loop then, is that a process reads from a location, modifies the value, and writes it back. The overall time is 4 cycles:

- Generate address from index
- Return value from table
- Modify value in some way
- Write it back to the table

There is no specific read/write mode where a client passes in a flag saying “read from X” or “write to X”. Clients can simulate a “read from X” by writing the original value, and a “write to X” by simply ignoring the returned value. However such use of the mode is not encouraged since each action consumes a minimum of 3 cycles (the modify is not required) and 2 data accesses instead of 1 access as provided by the specific Read and Write modes.

Interpolate Table

This is the same as a Direct Lookup in Read mode except that two values are returned for a given fixed-point index X instead of one. The values returned are Table[Int(X)], and Table[Int(X)+1]. If either index is out of bounds the DuplicateEdge flag determines whether the edge pixel or ConstantPixel is returned. Address generation is the same as Direct Lookup, with the exception that the second address is simply Address 1+1 or 2 depending on 8 or 16 bit data. Transferring the requested data to the Output FIFO takes 2 cycles (assuming a cache hit), although two 8-bit values may actually be returned from the cache to the Address Generator in a single 16-bit fetch.

DRAM FIFO

A special case of a read/write 1D table is a DRAM FIFO. It is often necessary to have a simulated FIFO of a given length using DRAM and associated caches. With a DRAM FIFO, clients do not index explicitly into the table, but write to the Output FIFO as if it was one end of a FIFO and read from the Input FIFO as if it was the other end of the same logical FIFO. 2 counters keep track of input and output positions in the simulated FIFO, and cache to DRAM as needed. Clients need to set both ReadEnable and WriteEnable bits in the Flags register.

An example use of a DRAM FIFO is keeping a single line history of some value. The initial history is written before processing begins. As the general process goes through a line, the previous line's value is retrieved from the FIFO, and this line's value is placed into the FIFO (this line will be the previous line when we process the next line). So long as input and outputs match each other on average, the Output FIFO should always be full. Consequently there is effectively no access delay for this kind of FIFO (unless the total FIFO length is very small—say 3 or 4 bytes, but that would defeat the purpose of the FIFO).

2 Dimensional Tables

Direct Lookup

A 2 dimensional direct lookup is not supported. Since all cases of 2D lookups are expected to be accessed for bi-linear interpolation, a special bi-linear lookup has been implemented.

Bi-Linear Lookup

This kind of lookup is necessary for bi-linear interpolation of data from a 2D table. Given fixed-point X and Y coordinates (placed into the Output FIFO in the order Y, X), 4 values are returned after lookup. The values (in order) are:

- Table[Int(X), Int(Y)]
- Table[Int(X)+1, Int(Y)]
- Table[Int(X), Int(Y)+1]
- Table[Int(X)+1, Int(Y)+1]

The order of values returned gives the best cache coherence. If the data is 8-bit, 2 values are returned each cycle over 2 cycles with the low order byte being the first data element. If the data is 16-bit, the 4 values are returned in 4 cycles, 1 entry per cycle. Address generation takes 2 cycles. The first cycle has the index (Y) barrel-shifted right FractY bits being multiplied by RowOffset, with the result added to ImageStart. The second cycle shifts the X index right by FractX bits, and then either the result (in the case of 8 bit data) or the result shifted left 1 bit (in the case of 16 bit data) is added to the result from the first cycle. This gives us address Adr=address of Table[Int(X), Int(Y)]:

$Adr = ImageStart + ShiftRight (Y, FractY) * RowOffset) + ShiftRight (X, FractX)$

We keep a copy of Adr in AdrOld for use fetching subsequent entries.

- If the data is 8 bits, the timing is 2 cycles of address generation, followed by 2 cycles of data being returned (2 table entries per cycle).
- If the data is 16 bits, the timing is 2 cycles of address generation, followed by 4 cycles of data being returned (1 entry per cycle)
  
  The following 2 tables show the method of address calculation for 8 and 16 bit data sizes:

Cycle
Calculation while fetching 2 × 8-bit data entries from Adr

1
Adr = Adr + RowOffset

2
<preparing next lookup>

Cycle
Calculation while fetching 1 × 16-bit data entry from Adr

1
Adr = Adr + 2

2
Adr = AdrOld + RowOffset

3
Adr = Adr + 2

4
<preparing next lookup>

In both cases, the first cycle of address generation can overlap the insertion of the X index into the FIFO, so the effective timing can be as low as 1 cycle for address generation, and 4 cycles of return data. If the generation of indexes is 2 steps ahead of the results, then there is no effective address generation time, and the data is simply produced at the appropriate rate (2 or 4 cycles per set).

3 Dimensional Lookup

Direct Lookup

Since all cases of 2D lookups are expected to be accessed for tri-linear interpolation, two special tri-linear lookups have been implemented. The first is a straightforward lookup table, while the second is for tri-linear interpolation from an Image Pyramid.

Tri-Linear Lookup

This type of lookup is useful for 3D tables of data, such as color conversion tables. The standard image parameters define a single XY plane of the data—i.e. each plane consists of ImageHeight rows, each row containing RowOffset bytes. In most circumstances, assuming contiguous planes, one XY plane will be ImageHeight×RowOffset bytes after another. Rather than assume or calculate this offset, the software via the CPU must provide it in the form of a 12-bit ZOffset register. In this form of lookup, given 3 fixed-point indexes in the order Z, Y, X, 8 values are returned in order from the lookup table:

- Table[Int(X), Int(Y), Int(Z)]
- Table[Int(X)+1, Int(Y), Int(Z)]
- Table[Int(X), Int(Y)+1, Int(Z)]
- Table[Int(X)+1, Int(Y)+1, Int(Z)]
- Table[Int(X), Int(Y), Int(Z)+1]
- Table[Int(X)+1, Int(Y), Int(Z)+1]
- Table[Int(X), Int(Y)+1, Int(Z)+1]
- Table[Int(X)+1, Int(Y)+1, Int(Z)+1]

The order of values returned gives the best cache coherence. If the data is 8-bit, 2 values are returned each cycle over 4 cycles with the low order byte being the first data element. If the data is 16-bit, the 4 values are returned in 8 cycles, 1 entry per cycle. Address generation takes 3 cycles. The first cycle has the index (Z) barrel-shifted right FractZ bits being multiplied by the 12-bit ZOffset and added to ImageStart. The second cycle has the index (Y) barrel-shifted right FractY bits being multiplied by RowOffset, with the result added to the result of the previous cycle. The second cycle shifts the X index right by FractX bits, and then either the result (in the case of 8 bit data) or the result shifted left 1 bit (in the case of 16 bit data) is added to the result from the second cycle. This gives us address Adr=address of Table[Int(X), Int(Y), Int(Z)]:

$Adr = ImageStart + (ShiftRight (Z, FractZ) * ZOffset) + (ShiftRight (Y, FractY) * RowOffset) + ShiftRight (X, FractX)$

We keep a copy of Adr in AdrOld for use fetching subsequent entries.

- If the data is 8 bits, the timing is 2 cycles of address generation, followed by 2 cycles of data being returned (2 table entries per cycle).
- If the data is 16 bits, the timing is 2 cycles of address generation, followed by 4 cycles of data being returned (1 entry per cycle)
  
  The following 2 tables show the method of address calculation for 8 and 16 bit data sizes:

Cycle
Calculation while fetching 2 × 8-bit data entries from Adr

1
Adr = Adr + RowOffset

2
Adr = AdrOld + ZOffset

3
Adr = Adr + RowOffset

4
<preparing next lookup>

Cycle
Calculation while fetching 1 × 16-bit data entries from Adr

1
Adr = Adr + 2

2
Adr = AdrOld + RowOffset

3
Adr = Adr + 2

4
Adr, AdrOld = AdrOld + Zoffset

5
Adr = Adr + 2

6
Adr = AdrOld + RowOffset

7
Adr = Adr + 2

8
<preparing next lookup>

In both cases, the cycles of address generation can overlap the insertion of the indexes into the FIFO, so the effective timing for a single one-off lookup can be as low as 1 cycle for address generation, and 4 cycles of return data. If the generation of indexes is 2 steps ahead of the results, then there is no effective address generation time, and the data is simply produced at the appropriate rate (4 or 8 cycles per set).

Image Pyramid Lookup

During brushing, tiling, and warping it is necessary to compute the average color of a particular area in an image. Rather than calculate the value for each area given, these functions make use of an image pyramid. The description and construction of an image pyramid is detailed in the section on Internal Image Formats in the DRAM interface 81 chapter of this document. This section is concerned with a method of addressing given pixels in the pyramid in terms of 3 fixed-point indexes ordered: level (Z), Y, and X. Note that Image Pyramid lookup assumes 8 bit data entries, so the DataSize flag is completely ignored. After specification of Z, Y, and X, the following 8 pixels are returned via the Input FIFO:

- The pixel at [Int(X), Int(Y)], level Int(Z)
- The pixel at [Int(X)+1, Int(Y)], level Int(Z)
- The pixel at [Int(X), Int(Y)+1], level Int(Z)
- The pixel at [Int(X)+1, Int(Y)+1], level Int(Z)
- The pixel at [Int(X), Int(Y)], level Int(Z)+1
- The pixel at [Int(X)+1, Int(Y)], level Int(Z)+1
- The pixel at [Int(X), Int(Y)+1], level Int(Z)+1
- The pixel at [Int(X)+1, Int(Y)+1], level Int(Z)+1

The 8 pixels are returned as 4×16 bit entries, with X and X+1 entries combined hi/lo. For example, if the scaled (X, Y) coordinate was (10.4, 12.7) the first 4 pixels returned would be: (10, 12), (11, 12), (10, 13) and (11, 13). When a coordinate is outside the valid range, clients have the choice of edge pixel duplication or returning of a constant color value via the DuplicateEdgePixels and ConstantPixel registers (only the low 8 bits are used). When the Image Pyramid has been constructed, there is a simple mapping from level 0 coordinates to level Z coordinates. The method is simply to shift the X or Y coordinate right by Z bits. This must be done in addition to the number of bits already shifted to retrieve the integer portion of the coordinate (i.e. shifting right FractX and FractY bits for X and Y ordinates respectively). To find the ImageStart and RowOffset value for a given level of the image pyramid, the 24-bit ZOffset register is used as a pointer to a Level Information Table. The table is an array of records, each representing a given level of the pyramid, ordered by level number. Each record consists of a 16-bit offset ZOffset from ImageStart to that level of the pyramid (64-byte aligned address as lower 6 bits of the offset are not present), and a 12 bit ZRowOffset for that level. Element 0 of the table would contain a ZOffset of 0, and a ZRowOffset equal to the general register RowOffset, as it simply points to the full sized image. The ZOffset value at element N of the table should be added to ImageStart to yield the effective ImageStart of level N of the image pyramid. The RowOffset value in element N of the table contains the RowOffset value for level N. The software running on the CPU must set up the table appropriately before using this addressing mode. The actual address generation is outlined here in a cycle by cycle description:

Load
From

Cycle
Register
Address
Other Operations

0
—
—
ZAdr = ShiftRight(Z, FractZ) + ZOffset

ZInt = ShiftRight(Z, FractZ)

1
ZOffset
Zadr
ZAdr += 2

YInt = ShiftRight(Y, FractY)

2
ZRowOffset
ZAdr
ZAdr += 2

YInt = ShiftRight(YInt, ZInt)

Adr = ZOffset + ImageStart

3
ZOffset
ZAdr
ZAdr += 2

Adr += ZrowOffset * YInt

XInt = ShiftRight(X, FractX)

4
ZAdr
ZAdr
Adr += ShiftRight(XInt, ZInt)

ZOffset += ShiftRight(XInt, 1)

5
FIFO
Adr
Adr += ZrowOffset

ZOffset += ImageStart

6
FIFO
Adr
Adr = (ZAdr * ShiftRight(Yint,1)) + ZOffset

7
FIFO
Adr
Adr += Zadr

8
FIFO
Adr
<Cycle 0 for next retrieval>

The address generation as described can be achieved using a single Barrel Shifter, 2 adders, and a single 16×16 multiply/add unit yielding 24 bits. Although some cycles have 2 shifts, they are either the same shift value (i.e. the output of the Barrel Shifter is used two times) or the shift is 1 bit, and can be hard wired. The following internal registers are required: ZAdr, Adr, ZInt, YInt, XInt, ZRowOffset, and ZlmageStart. The _Int registers only need to be 8 bits maximum, while the others can be up to 24 bits. Since this access method only reads from, and does not write to image pyramids, the CacheGroup2 is used to lookup the Image Pyramid Address Table (via ZAdr). CacheGroup1 is used for lookups to the image pyramid itself (via Adr). The address table is around 22 entries (depending on original image size), each of 4 bytes. Therefore 3 or 4 cache lines should be allocated to CacheGroup2, while as many cache lines as possible should be allocated to CacheGroup1. The timing is 8 cycles for returning a set of data, assuming that Cycle 8 and Cycle 0 overlap in operation—i.e. the next request's Cycle 0 occurs during Cycle 8. This is acceptable since Cycle 0 has no memory access, and Cycle 8 has no specific operations.

Generation of Coordinates Using VLIW Vector Processor 74

Some functions that are linked to Write Iterators require the X and/or Y coordinates of the current pixel being processed in part of the processing pipeline. Particular processing may also need to take place at the end of each row, or column being processed. In most cases, the PassX and PassY flags should be sufficient to completely generate all coordinates. However, if there are special requirements, the following functions can be used. The calculation can be spread over a number of ALUs, for a single cycle generation, or be in a single ALU 188 for a multi-cycle generation.

Generate Sequential [X, Y]

When a process is processing pixels in sequential order according to the Sequential Read Iterator (or generating pixels and writing them out to a Sequential Write Iterator), the following process can be used to generate X, Y coordinates instead of PassX/PassY flags as shown in FIG. 23.

The coordinate generator counts up to ImageWidth in the X ordinate, and once per ImageWidth pixels increments the Y ordinate. The actual process is illustrated in FIG. 24, where the following constants are set by software:

Constant
Value

K₁
ImageWidth

K₂
ImageHeight (optional)

The following registers are used to hold temporary variables:

Variable
Value

Reg₁
X (starts at 0 each line)

Reg₂
Y (starts at 0)

The requirements are summarized as follows:

Requirements
*+
+
R
K
LU
Iterators

General
0
¾
2
½
0
0

TOTAL
0
¾
2
½
0
0

Generate Vertical Strip [X, Y]

When a process is processing pixels in order to write them to a Vertical Strip Write Iterator, and for some reason cannot use the PassX/PassY flags, the process as illustrated in FIG. 25 can be used to generate X, Y coordinates. The coordinate generator simply counts up to ImageWidth in the X ordinate, and once per ImageWidth pixels increments the Y ordinate. The actual process is illustrated in FIG. 26, where the following constants are set by software:

Constant
Value

K₁
32

K₂
ImageWidth

K₃
ImageHeight

The following registers are used to hold temporary variables:

Variable
Value

Reg₁
StartX (starts at 0, and is incremented by 32 once per

vertical strip)

Reg₂
X

Reg₃
EndX (starts at 32 and is incremented by 32 to a maximum of

ImageWidth) once per vertical strip)

Reg₄
Y

The requirements are summarized as follows:

Requirements
*+
+
R
K
LU
Iterators

General
0
4
4
3
0
0

TOTAL
0
4
4
3
0
0

The calculations that occur once per vertical strip (2 additions, one of which has an associated MIN) are not included in the general timing statistics because they are not really part of the per pixel timing. However they do need to be taken into account for the programming of the microcode for the particular function.

Image Sensor Interface (ISI 83)

The Image Sensor Interface (ISI 83) takes data from the CMOS Image Sensor and makes it available for storage in DRAM. The image sensor has an aspect ratio of 3:2, with a typical resolution of 750×500 samples, yielding 375K (8 bits per pixel). Each 2×2 pixel block has the configuration as shown in FIG. 27. The ISI 83 is a state machine that sends control information to the Image Sensor, including frame sync pulses and pixel clock pulses in order to read the image. Pixels are read from the image sensor and placed into the VLIW Input FIFO 78. The VLIW is then able to process and/or store the pixels. This is illustrated further in FIG. 28. The ISI 83 is used in conjunction with a VLIW program that stores the sensed Photo Image in DRAM. Processing occurs in 2 steps:

- A small VLIW program reads the pixels from the FIFO and writes them to DRAM via a Sequential Write Iterator.
- The Photo Image in DRAM is rotated 90, 180 or 270 degrees according to the orientation of the camera when the photo was taken.

If the rotation is 0 degrees, then step 1 merely writes the Photo Image out to the final Photo Image location and step 2 is not performed. If the rotation is other than 0 degrees, the image is written out to a temporary area (for example into the Print Image memory area), and then rotated during step 2 into the final Photo Image location. Step 1 is very simple microcode, taking data from the VLIW Input FIFO 78 and writing it to a Sequential Write Iterator. Step 2's rotation is accomplished by using the accelerated Vark Affine Transform function. The processing is performed in 2 steps in order to reduce design complexity and to re-use the Vark affine transform rotate logic already required for images. This is acceptable since both steps are completed in approximately 0.03 seconds, a time imperceptible to the operator of the Artcam. Even so, the read process is sensor speed bound, taking 0.02 seconds to read the full frame, and approximately 0.01 seconds to rotate the image.

The orientation is important for converting between the sensed Photo Image and the internal format image, since the relative positioning of R, G, and B pixels changes with orientation. The processed image may also have to be rotated during the Print process in order to be in the correct orientation for printing. The 3D model of the Artcam has 2 image sensors, with their inputs multiplexed to a single ISI 83 (different microcode, but same ACP 31). Since each sensor is a frame store, both images can be taken simultaneously, and then transferred to memory one at a time.

Display Controller 88

When the “Take” button on an Artcam is half depressed, the TFT will display the current image from the image sensor (converted via a simple VLIW process). Once the Take button is fully depressed, the Taken Image is displayed. When the user presses the Print button and image processing begins, the TFT is turned off. Once the image has been printed the TFT is turned on again. The Display Controller 88 is used in those Artcam models that incorporate a flat panel display. An example display is a TFT LCD of resolution 240×160 pixels. The structure of the Display Controller 88 is illustrated in FIG. 29. The Display Controller 88 State Machine contains registers that control the timing of the Sync Generation, where the display image is to be taken from (in DRAM via the Data cache 76 via a specific Cache Group), and whether the TFT should be active or not (via TFT Enable) at the moment. The CPU can write to these registers via the low speed bus. Displaying a 240×160 pixel image on an RGB TFT requires 3 components per pixel. The image taken from DRAM is displayed via 3 DACs, one for each of the R, G, and B output signals. At an image refresh rate of 30 frames per second (60 fields per second) the Display Controller 88 requires data transfer rates of:

240×160×3×30=3.5 MB per second

This data rate is low compared to the rest of the system. However it is high enough to cause VLIW programs to slow down during the intensive image processing. The general principles of TFT operation should reflect this.

Image Data Formats

There are three logical types of images manipulated by the ACP. They are:

- CCD Image, which is the Input Image captured from the CCD.
- Internal Image format—the Image format utilised internally by the Artcam device.

Print Image—the Output Image Format Printed by the Artcam

CCD Image Organization

Although many different CCD image sensors could be utilised, it will be assumed that the CCD itself is a 750×500 image sensor, yielding 375,000 bytes (8 bits per pixel). Each 2×2 pixel block having the configuration as depicted in FIG. 30.

A CCD Image as stored in DRAM has consecutive pixels with a given line contiguous in memory. Each line is stored one after the other. The image sensor Interface 83 is responsible for taking data from the CCD and storing it in the DRAM correctly oriented. Thus a CCD image with rotation 0 degrees has its first line G, R, G, R, G, R . . . and its second line as B, G, B, G, B, G . . . . If the CCD image should be portrait, rotated 90 degrees, the first line will be R, G, R, G, R, G and the second line G, B, G, B, G, B . . . etc.

Pixels are stored in an interleaved fashion since all color components are required in order to convert to the internal image format.

It should be noted that the ACP 31 makes no assumptions about the CCD pixel format, since the actual CCDs for imaging may vary from Artcam to Artcam, and over time. All processing that takes place via the hardware is controlled by major microcode in an attempt to extend the usefulness of the ACP 31.

Internal Image Organization

Internal images typically consist of a number of channels. Vark images can include, but are not limited to:

Lab

Labα

LabΔ

αΔ,

L, a and b correspond to components of the Lab color space, α is a matte channel (used for compositing), and Δ is a bump-map channel (used during brushing, tiling and illuminating).

The VLIW processor 74 requires images to be organized in a planar configuration. Thus a Lab image would be stored as 3 separate blocks of memory:

one block for the L channel,

one block for the a channel, and

one block for the b channel

Within each channel block, pixels are stored contiguously for a given row (plus some optional padding bytes), and rows are stored one after the other.

Turning to FIG. 31 there is illustrated an example form of storage of a logical image 100. The logical image 100 is stored in a planar fashion having L 101, a 102 and b 103 color components stored one after another. Alternatively, the logical image 100 can be stored in a compressed format having an uncompressed L component 101 and compressed A and B components 105, 106.

Turning to FIG. 32, the pixels of for line n 110 are stored together before the pixels of for line and n+1 (111). With the image being stored in contiguous memory within a single channel.

In the 8 MB-memory model, the final Print Image after all processing is finished, needs to be compressed in the chrominance channels. Compression of chrominance channels can be 4:1, causing an overall compression of 12:6, or 2:1.

Other than the final Print Image, images in the Artcam are typically not compressed. Because of memory constraints, software may choose to compress the final Print Image in the chrominance channels by scaling each of these channels by 2:1. If this has been done, the PRINT Vark function call utilised to print an image must be told to treat the specified chrominance channels as compressed. The PRINT function is the only function that knows how to deal with compressed chrominance, and even so, it only deals with a fixed 2:1 compression ratio.

Although it is possible to compress an image and then operate on the compressed image to create the final print image, it is not recommended due to a loss in resolution. In addition, an image should only be compressed once—as the final stage before printout. While one compression is virtually undetectable, multiple compressions may cause substantial image degradation.

Clip Image Organization

Clip images stored on Artcards have no explicit support by the ACP 31. Software is responsible for taking any images from the current Artcard and organizing the data into a form known by the ACP. If images are stored compressed on an Artcard, software is responsible for decompressing them, as there is no specific hardware support for decompression of Artcard images.

Image Pyramid Organization

During brushing, tiling, and warping processes utilised to manipulate an image it is often necessary to compute the average color of a particular area in an image. Rather than calculate the value for each area given, these functions make use of an image pyramid. As illustrated in FIG. 33, an image pyramid is effectively a multi-resolutionpixel-map. The original image 115 is a 1:1 representation. Low-pass filtering and sub-sampling by 2:1 in each dimension produces an image ¼ the original size 116. This process continues until the entire image is represented by a single pixel. An image pyramid is constructed from an original internal format image, and consumes ⅓ of the size taken up by the original image (¼+ 1/16+ 1/64+ . . . ). For an original image of 1500×1000 the corresponding image pyramid is approximately ½ MB. An image pyramid is constructed by a specific Vark function, and is used as a parameter to other Vark functions.

Print Image Organization

The entire processed image is required at the same time in order to print it. However the Print Image output can comprise a CMY dithered image and is only a transient image format, used within the Print Image functionality. However, it should be noted that color conversion will need to take place from the internal color space to the print color space. In addition, color conversion can be tuned to be different for different print rolls in the camera with different ink characteristics e.g. Sepia output can be accomplished by using a specific sepia toning Artcard, or by using a sepia tone print-roll (so all Artcards will work in sepia tone).

Color Spaces

As noted previously there are 3 color spaces used in the Artcam, corresponding to the different image types.

The ACP has no direct knowledge of specific color spaces. Instead, it relies on client color space conversion tables to convert between CCD, internal, and printer color spaces:

CCD:RGB

Internal:Lab

Printer:CMY

Removing the color space conversion from the ACP 31 allows:

- Different CCDs to be used in different cameras
- Different inks (in different print rolls over time) to be used in the same camera
- Separation of CCD selection from ACP design path
- A well defined internal color space for accurate color processing
  
  Artcard Interface 87

The Artcard Interface (AI) takes data from the linear image Sensor while an Artcard is passing under it, and makes that data available for storage in DRAM. The image sensor produces 11,000 8-bit samples per scanline, sampling the Artcard at 4800 dpi. The AI is a state machine that sends control information to the linear sensor, including LineSync pulses and PixelClock pulses in order to read the image. Pixels are read from the linear sensor and placed into the VLIW Input FIFO 78. The VLIW is then able to process and/or store the pixels. The AI has only a few registers:

Register Name
Description

NumPixels
The number of pixels in a sensor line (approx

11,000)

Status
The Print Head Interface's Status Register

PixelsRemaining
The number of bytes remaining in the current line

Actions

Reset
A write to this register resets the AI, stops any scan-

ning, and loads all registers with 0.

Scan
A write to this register with a non-zero value sets the

Scanning bit of the Status register, and causes the

Artcard Interface Scan cycle to start.

A write to this register with 0 stops the scanning

process and clears the Scanning bit in the Status

register.

The Scan cycle causes the AI to transfer NumPixels

bytes from the sensor to the VLIW Input FIFO 78,

producing the PixelClock signals appropriately.

Upon completion of NumPixels bytes, a LineSync

pulse is given and the Scan cycle restarts.

The PixelsRemaining register holds the number of

pixels remaining to be read on the current scanline.

Note that the CPU should clear the VLIW Input FIFO 78 before initiating a Scan. The Status register has bit interpretations as follows:

Bit Name
Bits
Description

Scanning
1
If set, the AI is currently scanning, with the number of

pixels remaining to be transferred from the current line

recorded in PixelsRemaining.

If clear, the AI is not currently scanning, so is not

transferring pixels to the VLIW Input FIFO 78.

Artcard Interface (AI) 87

The Artcard Interface (AI) 87 is responsible for taking an Artcard image from the Artcard Reader 34, and decoding it into the original data (usually a Vark script). Specifically, the AI 87 accepts signals from the Artcard scanner linear CCD 34, detects the bit pattern printed on the card, and converts the bit pattern into the original data, correcting read errors.

With no Artcard 9 inserted, the image printed from an Artcam is simply the sensed Photo Image cleaned up by any standard image processing routines. The Artcard 9 is the means by which users are able to modify a photo before printing it out. By the simple task of inserting a specific Artcard 9 into an Artcam, a user is able to define complex image processing to be performed on the Photo Image. With no Artcard inserted the Photo Image is processed in a standard way to create the Print Image. When a single Artcard 9 is inserted into the Artcam, that Artcard's effect is applied to the Photo Image to generate the Print Image.

When the Artcard 9 is removed (ejected), the printed image reverts to the Photo Image processed in a standard way. When the user presses the button to eject an Artcard, an event is placed in the event queue maintained by the operating system running on the Artcam Central Processor 31. When the event is processed (for example after the current Print has occurred), the following things occur:

If the current Artcard is valid, then the Print Image is marked as invalid and a ‘Process Standard’ event is placed in the event queue. When the event is eventually processed it will perform the standard image processing operations on the Photo Image to produce the Print Image.

The motor is started to eject the Artcard and a time-specific ‘Stop-Motor’ Event is added to the event queue.

Inserting an Artcard

When a user inserts an Artcard 9, the Artcard Sensor 49 detects it notifying the ACP72. This results in the software inserting an ‘Artcard Inserted’ event into the event queue. When the event is processed several things occur:

The current Artcard is marked as invalid (as opposed to ‘none’).

The Print Image is marked as invalid.

The Artcard motor 37 is started up to load the Artcard

The Artcard Interface 87 is instructed to read the Artcard

The Artcard Interface 87 accepts signals from the Artcard scanner linear CCD 34, detects the bit pattern printed on the card, and corrects errors in the detected bit pattern, producing a valid Artcard data block in DRAM.

Reading Data from the Artcard CCD—General Considerations

As illustrated in FIG. 34, the Data Card reading process has 4 phases operated while the pixel data is read from the card. The phases are as follows:

Phase 1.
Detect data area on Artcard

Phase 2.
Detect bit pattern from Artcard based on CCD pixels, and write

as bytes.

Phase 3.
Descramble and XOR the byte-pattern

Phase 4.
Decode data (Reed-Solomon decode)

As illustrated in FIG. 35, the Artcard 9 must be sampled at least at double the printed resolution to satisfy Nyquist's Theorem. In practice it is better to sample at a higher rate than this. Preferably, the pixels are sampled 230 at 3 times the resolution of a printed dot in each dimension, requiring 9 pixels to define a single dot. Thus if the resolution of the Artcard 9 is 1600 dpi, and the resolution of the sensor 34 is 4800 dpi, then using a 50 mm CCD image sensor results in 9450 pixels per column. Therefore if we require 2 MB of dot data (at 9 pixels per dot) then this requires 2 MB*8*9/9450=15,978 columns=approximately 16,000 columns. Of course if a dot is not exactly aligned with the sampling CCD the worst and most likely case is that a dot will be sensed over a 16 pixel area (4×4) 231.

An Artcard 9 may be slightly warped due to heat damage, slightly rotated (up to, say 1 degree) due to differences in insertion into an Artcard reader, and can have slight differences in true data rate due to fluctuations in the speed of the reader motor 37. These changes will cause columns of data from the card not to be read as corresponding columns of pixel data. As illustrated in FIG. 36, a 1 degree rotation in the Artcard 9 can cause the pixels from a column on the card to be read as pixels across 166 columns:

Finally, the Artcard 9 should be read in a reasonable amount of time with respect to the human operator. The data on the Artcard covers most of the Artcard surface, so timing concerns can be limited to the Artcard data itself. A reading time of 1.5 seconds is adequate for Artcard reading.

The Artcard should be loaded in 1.5 seconds. Therefore all 16,000 columns of pixel data must be read from the CCD 34 in 1.5 second, i.e. 10,667 columns per second. Therefore the time available to read one column is 1/10667 seconds, or 93,747 ns. Pixel data can be written to the DRAM one column at a time, completely independently from any processes that are reading the pixel data.

The time to write one column of data (9450/2 bytes since the reading can be 4 bits per pixel giving 2×4 bit pixels per byte) to DRAM is reduced by using 8 cache lines. If 4 lines were written out at one time, the 4 banks can be written to independently, and thus overlap latency reduced. Thus the 4725 bytes can be written in 11,840 ns (4725/128*320 ns). Thus the time taken to write a given column's data to DRAM uses just under 13% of the available bandwidth.

Decoding an Artcard

A simple look at the data sizes shows the impossibility of fitting the process into the 8 MB of memory 33 if the entire Artcard pixel data (140 MB if each bit is read as a 3×3 array) as read by the linear CCD 34 is kept. For this reason, the reading of the linear CCD, decoding of the bitmap, and the un-bitmap process should take place in real-time (while the Artcard 9 is traveling past the linear CCD 34), and these processes must effectively work without having entire data stores available.

When an Artcard 9 is inserted, the old stored Print Image and any expanded Photo Image becomes invalid. The new Artcard 9 can contain directions for creating a new image based on the currently captured Photo Image. The old Print Image is invalid, and the area holding expanded Photo Image data and image pyramid is invalid, leaving more than 5 MB that can be used as scratch memory during the read process. Strictly speaking, the 1 MB area where the Artcard raw data is to be written can also be used as scratch data during the Artcard read process as long as by the time the final Reed-Solomon decode is to occur, that 1 MB area is free again. The reading process described here does not make use of the extra 1 MB area (except as a final destination for the data).

It should also be noted that the unscrambling process requires two sets of 2 MB areas of memory since unscrambling cannot occur in place. Fortunately the 5 MB scratch area contains enough space for this process.

Turning now to FIG. 37, there is shown a flowchart 220 of the steps necessary to decode the Artcard data. These steps include reading in the Artcard 221, decoding the read data to produce corresponding encoded XORed scrambled bitmap data 223. Next a checkerboard XOR is applied to the data to produces encoded scrambled data 224. This data is then unscrambled 227 to produce data 225 before this data is subjected to Reed-Solomon decoding to produce the original raw data 226. Alternatively, unscrambling and XOR process can take place together, not requiring a separate pass of the data. Each of the above steps is discussed in further detail hereinafter. As noted previously with reference to FIG. 37, the Artcard Interface, therefore, has 4 phases, the first 2 of which are time-critical, and must take place while pixel data is being read from the CCD:

The four phases are described in more detail as follows:

Phase 1. As the Artcard 9 moves past the CCD 34 the AI must detect the start of the data area by robustly detecting special targets on the Artcard to the left of the data area. If these cannot be detected, the card is marked as invalid. The detection must occur in real-time, while the Artcard 9 is moving past the CCD 34.

If necessary, rotation invariance can be provided. In this case, the targets are repeated on the right side of the Artcard, but relative to the bottom right corner instead of the top corner. In this way the targets end up in the correct orientation if the card is inserted the “wrong” way. Phase 3 below can be altered to detect the orientation of the data, and account for the potential rotation.

Phase 2. Once the data area has been determined, the main read process begins, placing pixel data from the CCD into an ‘Artcard data window’, detecting bits from this window, assembling the detected bits into bytes, and constructing a byte-image in DRAM. This must all be done while the Artcard is moving past the CCD.

Phase 3. Once all the pixels have been read from the Artcard data area, the Artcard motor 37 can be stopped, and the byte image descrambled and XORed. Although not requiring real-time performance, the process should be fast enough not to annoy the human operator. The process must take 2 MB of scrambled bit-image and write the unscrambled/XORed bit-image to a separate 2 MB image.

Phase 4. The final phase in the Artcard read process is the Reed-Solomon decoding process, where the 2 MB bit-image is decoded into a 1 MB valid Artcard data area. Again, while not requiring real-time performance it is still necessary to decode quickly with regard to the human operator. If the decode process is valid, the card is marked as valid. If the decode failed, any duplicates of data in the bit-image are attempted to be decoded, a process that is repeated until success or until there are no more duplicate images of the data in the bit image.

The four phase process described requires 4.5 MB of DRAM. 2 MB is reserved for Phase 2 output, and 0.5 MB is reserved for scratch data during phases 1 and 2. The remaining 2 MB of space can hold over 440 columns at 4725 byes per column. In practice, the pixel data being read is a few columns ahead of the phase 1 algorithm, and in the worst case, about 180 columns behind phase 2, comfortably inside the 440 column limit.

A description of the actual operation of each phase will now be provided in greater detail.

Phase 1—Detect Data Area on Artcard

This phase is concerned with robustly detecting the left-hand side of the data area on the Artcard 9. Accurate detection of the data area is achieved by accurate detection of special targets printed on the left side of the card. These targets are especially designed to be easy to detect even if rotated up to 1 degree.

Turning to FIG. 38, there is shown an enlargement of the left hand side of an Artcard 9. The side of the card is divided into 16 bands, 239 with a target eg. 241 located at the center of each band. The bands are logical in that there is no line drawn to separate bands. Turning to FIG. 39, there is shown a single target 241. The target 241, is a printed black square containing a single white dot. The idea is to detect firstly as many targets 241 as possible, and then to join at least 8 of the detected white-dot locations into a single logical straight line. If this can be done, the start of the data area 243 is a fixed distance from this logical line. If it cannot be done, then the card is rejected as invalid.

As shown in FIG. 38, the height of the card 9 is 3150 dots. A target (Target0) 241 is placed a fixed distance of 24 dots away from the top left corner 244 of the data area so that it falls well within the first of 16 equal sized regions 239 of 192 dots (576 pixels) with no target in the final pixel region of the card. The target 241 must be big enough to be easy to detect, yet be small enough not to go outside the height of the region if the card is rotated 1 degree. A suitable size for the target is a 31×31 dot (93×93 sensed pixels) black square 241 with the white dot 242.

At the worst rotation of 1 degree, a 1 column shift occurs every 57 pixels. Therefore in a 590 pixel sized band, we cannot place any part of our symbol in the top or bottom 12 pixels or so of the band or they could be detected in the wrong band at CCD read time if the card is worst case rotated.

Therefore, if the black part of the rectangle is 57 pixels high (19 dots) we can be sure that at least 9.5 black pixels will be read in the same column by the CCD (worst case is half the pixels are in one column and half in the next). To be sure of reading at least 10 black dots in the same column, we must have a height of 20 dots. To give room for erroneous detection on the edge of the start of the black dots, we increase the number of dots to 31, giving us 15 on either side of the white dot at the target's local coordinate (15, 15). 31 dots is 91 pixels, which at most suffers a 3 pixel shift in column, easily within the 576 pixel band.

Thus each target is a block of 31×31 dots (93×93 pixels) each with the composition:

15 columns of 31 black dots each (45 pixel width columns of 93 pixels).

1 column of 15 black dots (45 pixels) followed by 1 white dot (3 pixels) and then a further 15 black dots (45 pixels)

15 columns of 31 black dots each (45 pixel width columns of 93 pixels)

Detect Targets

Targets are detected by reading columns of pixels, one column at a time rather than by detecting dots. It is necessary to look within a given band for a number of columns consisting of large numbers of contiguous black pixels to build up the left side of a target. Next, it is expected to see a white region in the center of further black columns, and finally the black columns to the left of the target center.

Eight cache lines are required for good cache performance on the reading of the pixels. Each logical read fills 4 cache lines via 4 sub-reads while the other 4 cache-lines are being used. This effectively uses up 13% of the available DRAM bandwidth.

As illustrated in FIG. 40, the detection mechanism FIFO for detecting the targets uses a filter 245, run-length encoder 246, and a FIFO 247 that requires special wiring of the top 3 elements (S1, S2, and S3) for random access.

The columns of input pixels are processed one at a time until either all the targets are found, or until a specified number of columns have been processed. To process a column, the pixels are read from DRAM, passed through a filter 245 to detect a 0 or 1, and then run length encoded 246. The bit value and the number of contiguous bits of the same value are placed in FIFO 247. Each entry of the FIFO 249 is in 8 bits, 7 bits 250 to hold the run-length, and 1 bit 249 to hold the value of the bit detected.

The run-length encoder 246 only encodes contiguous pixels within a 576 pixel (192 dot) region.

The top 3 elements in the FIFO 247 can be accessed 252 in any random order. The run lengths (in pixels) of these entries are filtered into 3 values: short, medium, and long in accordance with the following table:

Short
Used to detect white dot.
RunLength < 16

Medium
Used to detect runs of black above
16 <=

or below the white dot in the center
RunLength < 48

of the target.

Long
Used to detect run lengths of black
RunLength >= 48

to the left and right of the center dot in

the target.

Looking at the top three entries in the FIFO 247 there are 3 specific cases of interest:

Case 1
S1 = white long
We have detected a black column

S2 = black long
of the target to the left of or to the

S3 = white medium/long
right of the white center dot.

Case 2
S1 = white long
If we've been processing a series

S2 = black medium
of columns of Case 1s, then we

S3 = white short
have probably detected the white

Previous 8 columns
dot in this column. We know that

were Case 1
the next entry will be black (or it

would have been included in the

white S3 entry), but the number of

black pixels is in question. Need to

verify by checking after the next

FIFO advance (see Case 3).

Case 3
Prev = Case 2
We have detected part of the white

S3 = black med
dot. We expect around 3 of these,

and then some more columns of

Case 1.

Preferably, the following information per region band is kept:

TargetDetected
1
bit

BlackDetectCount
4
bits

WhiteDetectCount
3
bits

PrevColumnStartPixel
15
bits

TargetColumn ordinate
16
bits (15:1)

TargetRow ordinate
16
bits (15:1)

TOTAL
7
bytes (rounded to 8 bytes for easy

addressing)

Given a total of 7 bytes. It makes address generation easier if the total is assumed to be 8 bytes. Thus 16 entries requires 16*8=128 bytes, which fits in 4 cache lines. The address range should be inside the scratch 0.5 MB DRAM area since other phases make use of the remaining 4 MB data area.

When beginning to process a given pixel column, the register value S2StartPixel 254 is reset to 0. As entries in the FIFO advance from S2 to S1, they are also added 255 to the existing S2StartPixel value, giving the exact pixel position of the run currently defined in S2. Looking at each of the 3 cases of interest in the FIFO, S2StartPixel can be used to determine the start of the black area of a target (Cases 1 and 2), and also the start of the white dot in the center of the target (Case 3). An algorithm for processing columns can be as follows:

1
TargetDetected[0-15] := 0

BlackDetectCount[0-15] := 0

WhiteDetectCount[0-15] := 0

TargetRow[0-15] := 0

TargetColumn[0-15] := 0

PrevColStartPixel[0-15] := 0

CurrentColumn := 0

2
Do ProcessColumn

3
CurrentColumn++

4
If (CurrentColumn <= LastValidColumn)

Goto 2

The steps involved in the processing a column (Process Column) are as follows:

1
S2StartPixel := 0

FIFO := 0

BlackDetectCount := 0

WhiteDetectCount := 0

ThisColumnDetected := FALSE

PrevCaseWasCase2 := FALSE

2
If (! TargetDetected[Target]) &

(! ColumnDetected[Target])

ProcessCases

EndIf

3
PrevCaseWasCase2 := Case = 2

4
Advance FIFO

The processing for each of the 3 (Process Cases) cases is as follows:

Case 1:

BlackDetectCount[target] < 8
Δ := ABS(S2StartPixel −

OR
PrevColStartPixel[Target])

WhiteDetectCount[Target] = 0
If (0 <= Δ < 2)

BlackDetectCount[Target]++

(max value = 8)

Else

BlackDetectCount

[Target] := 1

WhiteDetectCount

[Target] := 0

EndIf

PrevColStartPixel

[Target] := S2StartPixel

ColumnDetected

[Target] := TRUE

BitDetected = 1

BlackDetectCount[target] >= 8
PrevColStartPixel[Target] :=

S2StartPixel

WhiteDetectCount[Target] != 0
ColumnDetected[Target] :=

TRUE

BitDetected = 1

TargetDetected[Target] :=

TRUE

TargetColumn[Target] := Current

Column − 8 −

(WhiteDetectCount[Target]/2)

Case 2:

No special processing is recorded except for setting the ‘PrevCaseWasCase2’ flag for identifying Case 3 (see Step 3 of processing a column described above)

Case 3:

PrevCaseWasCase2 = TRUE
If (WhiteDetectCount[Target] < 2)

BlackDetectCount
TargetRow[Target] = S2

[Target] >= 8
StartPixel + (S2_RunLength/2)

WhiteDetectCount = 1
EndIf

Δ := ABS(S2StartPixel −

PrevColStartPixel[Target])

If (0 <= Δ < 2)

WhiteDetectCount[Target]++

Else

WhiteDetectCount[Target] := 1

EndIf

PrevColStartPixel[Target] := S2StartPixel

ThisColumnDetected := TRUE

BitDetected = 0

At the end of processing a given column, a comparison is made of the current column to the maximum number of columns for target detection. If the number of columns allowed has been exceeded, then it is necessary to check how many targets have been found. If fewer than 8 have been found, the card is considered invalid.

Process Targets

After the targets have been detected, they should be processed. All the targets may be available or merely some of them. Some targets may also have been erroneously detected.

This phase of processing is to determine a mathematical line that passes through the center of as many targets as possible. The more targets that the line passes through, the more confident the target position has been found. The limit is set to be 8 targets. If a line passes through at least 8 targets, then it is taken to be the right one.

It is all right to take a brute-force but straightforward approach since there is the time to do so (see below), and lowering complexity makes testing easier. It is necessary to determine the line between targets 0 and 1 (if both targets are considered valid) and then determine how many targets fall on this line. Then we determine the line between targets 0 and 2, and repeat the process. Eventually we do the same for the line between targets 1 and 2, 1 and 3 etc. and finally for the line between targets 14 and 15. Assuming all the targets have been found, we need to perform 15+14+13+ . . . =90 sets of calculations (with each set of calculations requiring 16 tests=1440 actual calculations), and choose the line which has the maximum number of targets found along the line. The algorithm for target location can be as follows:

TargetA := 0

MaxFound := 0

BestLine := 0

While (TargetA < 15)

If (TargetA is Valid)

TargetB:= TargetA + 1

While (TargetB<= 15)

If (TargetB is valid)

CurrentLine := line between TargetA and TargetB

TargetC := 0;

While (TargetC <= 15)

If (TargetC valid AND TargetC on line AB)

TargetsHit++

EndIf

If (TargetsHit > MaxFound)

MaxFound := TargetsHit

BestLine := CurrentLine

EndIf

TargetC++

EndWhile

EndIf

TargetB ++

EndWhile

EndIf

TargetA++

EndWhile

If (MaxFound < 8)

Card is Invalid

Else

Store expected centroids for rows based on BestLine

EndIf

As illustrated in FIG. 34, in the algorithm above, to determine a CurrentLine 260 from Target A 261 and target B, it is necessary to calculate Δrow (264) & Δcolumn (263) between targets 261, 262, and the location of Target A. It is then possible to move from Target 0 to Target 1 etc. by adding Δrow and Δcolumn. The found (if actually found) location of target N can be compared to the calculated expected position of Target N on the line, and if it falls within the tolerance, then Target N is determined to be on the line.

To calculate Arow & Acolumn:

Δrow=(row_TargetA−row_TargetB)/(B−A)
Δcolumn=(column_TargetA−column_TargetB)/(B−A)

Then we calculate the position of Target0:

row=rowTargetA−(A*Δrow)
column=columnTargetA−(A*Δcolumn)

And compare (row, column) against the actual row_Target0and column_Target0. To move from one expected target to the next (e.g. from Target0 to Target1), we simply add Δrow and Δcolumn to row and column respectively. To check if each target is on the line, we must calculate the expected position of Target0, and then perform one add and one comparison for each target ordinate.

At the end of comparing all 16 targets against a maximum of 90 lines, the result is the best line through the valid targets. If that line passes through at least 8 targets (i.e. MaxFound>=8), it can be said that enough targets have been found to form a line, and thus the card can be processed. If the best line passes through fewer than 8, then the card is considered invalid.

The resulting algorithm takes 180 divides to calculate Δrow and Δcolumn, 180 multiply/adds to calculate target0 position, and then 2880 adds/comparisons. The time we have to perform this processing is the time taken to read 36 columns of pixel data=3,374,892 ns. Not even accounting for the fact that an add takes less time than a divide, it is necessary to perform 3240 mathematical operations in 3,374,892 ns. That gives approximately 1040 ns per operation, or 104 cycles. The CPU can therefore safely perform the entire processing of targets, reducing complexity of design.

Update Centroids Based on Data Edge Border and Clockmarks

Step 0: Locate the Data Area

From Target 0 (241 of FIG. 38) it is a predetermined fixed distance in rows and columns to the top left border 244 of the data area, and then a further 1 dot column to the vertical clock marks 276. So we use TargetA, Δrow and Δcolumn found in the previous stage (Δrow and Δcolumn refer to distances between targets) to calculate the centroid or expected location for Target0 as described previously.

Since the fixed pixel offset from Target0 to the data area is related to the distance between targets (192 dots between targets, and 24 dots between Target0 and the data area 243), simply add Δrow/8 to Target0's centroid column coordinate (aspect ratio of dots is 1:1). Thus the top co-ordinate can be defined as:

(column_DotColumnTop=column_Target0+(Δrow/8)
(row_DotcolumnTop=row_Target0+(Δcolumn/8)

Next Δrow and Δcolumn are updated to give the number of pixels between dots in a single column (instead of between targets) by dividing them by the number of dots between targets:

Δrow=Δrow/192
Δcolumn=Δcolumn/192

We also set the currentColumn register (see Phase 2) to be −1 so that after step 2, when phase 2 begins, the currentColumn register will increment from −1 to 0.

Step 1: Write Out the Initial Centroid Deltas (Δ) and Bit History

This simply involves writing setup information required for Phase 2.

This can be achieved by writing 0s to all the Δrow and Δcolumn entries for each row, and a bit history. The bit history is actually an expected bit history since it is known that to the left of the clock mark column 276 is a border column 277, and before that, a white area. The bit history therefore is 011, 010, 011, 010 etc.

Step 2: Update the Centroids Based on Actual Pixels Read.

The bit history is set up in Step 1 according to the expected clock marks and data border. The actual centroids for each dot row can now be more accurately set (they were initially 0) by comparing the expected data against the actual pixel values. The centroid updating mechanism is achieved by simply performing step 3 of Phase 2.

Phase 2—Detect Bit Pattern from Artcard Based on Pixels Read, and Write as Bytes.

Since a dot from the Artcard 9 requires a minimum of 9 sensed pixels over 3 columns to be represented, there is little point in performing dot detection calculations every sensed pixel column. It is better to average the time required for processing over the average dot occurrence, and thus make the most of the available processing time. This allows processing of a column of dots from an Artcard 9 in the time it takes to read 3 columns of data from the Artcard. Although the most likely case is that it takes 4 columns to represent a dot, the 4^thcolumn will be the last column of one dot and the first column of a next dot. Processing should therefore be limited to only 3 columns.

As the pixels from the CCD are written to the DRAM in 13% of the time available, 83% of the time is available for processing of 1 column of dots i.e. 83% of (93,747*3)=83% of 281,241 ns=233,430 ns.

In the available time, it is necessary to detect 3150 dots, and write their bit values into the raw data area of memory. The processing therefore requires the following steps:

For each column of dots on the Artcard:

Step 0: Advance to the next dot column

Step 1: Detect the top and bottom of an Artcard dot column (check clock marks)

Step 2: Process the dot column, detecting bits and storing them appropriately

Step 3: Update the centroids

Since we are processing the Artcard's logical dot columns, and these may shift over 165 pixels, the worst case is that we cannot process the first column until at least 165 columns have been read into DRAM. Phase 2 would therefore finish the same amount of time after the read process had terminated. The worst case time is: 165*93,747 ns=15,468,255 ns or 0.015 seconds.

Step 0: Advance to the Next Dot Column

In order to advance to the next column of dots we add Arow and Acolumn to the dotColumnTop to give us the centroid of the dot at the top of the column. The first time we do this, we are currently at the clock marks column 276 to the left of the bit image data area, and so we advance to the first column of data. Since Δrow and Δcolumn refer to distance between dots within a column, to move between dot columns it is necessary to add Δrow to column_dotcolumnTopand Δcolumn to row_dotColumnTop.

To keep track of what column number is being processed, the column number is recorded in a register called CurrentColumn. Every time the sensor advances to the next dot column it is necessary to increment the CurrentColumn register. The first time it is incremented, it is incremented from −1 to 0 (see Step 0 Phase 1). The CurrentColumn register determines when to terminate the read process (when reaching maxColumns), and also is used to advance the DataOut Pointer to the next column of byte information once all 8 bits have been written to the byte (once every 8 dot columns). The lower 3 bits determine what bit we're up to within the current byte. It will be the same bit being written for the whole column.

Step 1: Detect the Top and Bottom of an Artcard Dot Column.

In order to process a dot column from an Artcard, it is necessary to detect the top and bottom of a column. The column should form a straight line between the top and bottom of the column (except for local warping etc.). Initially dotColumnTop points to the clock mark column 276. We simply toggle the expected value, write it out into the bit history, and move on to step 2, whose first task will be to add the Δrow and Δcolumn values to dotColumnTop to arrive at the first data dot of the column.

Step 2: Process an Artcard's Dot Column

Given the centroids of the top and bottom of a column in pixel coordinates the column should form a straight line between them, with possible minor variances due to warping etc.

Assuming the processing is to start at the top of a column (at the top centroid coordinate) and move down to the bottom of the column, subsequent expected dot centroids are given as:

row_next=row+Δrow
column_next=column+Δcolumn

This gives us the address of the expected centroid for the next dot of the column. However to account for local warping and error we add another Δrow and Δcolumn based on the last time we found the dot in a given row. In this way we can account for small drifts that accumulate into a maximum drift of some percentage from the straight line joining the top of the column to the bottom.

We therefore keep 2 values for each row, but store them in separate tables since the row history is used in step 3 of this phase.

- Δrow and Δcolumn (2 @ 4 bits each=1 byte)
- row history (3 bits per row, 2 rows are stored per byte)

For each row we need to read a Arow and Acolumn to determine the change to the centroid. The read process takes 5% of the bandwidth and 2 cache lines:

76*(3150/32)+2*3150=13,824 ns=5% of bandwidth

Once the centroid has been determined, the pixels around the centroid need to be examined to detect the status of the dot and hence the value of the bit. In the worst case a dot covers a 4×4 pixel area. However, thanks to the fact that we are sampling at 3 times the resolution of the dot, the number of pixels required to detect the status of the dot and hence the bit value is much less than this. We only require access to 3 columns of pixel columns at any one time.

In the worst case of pixel drift due to a 1% rotation, centroids will shift 1 column every 57 pixel rows, but since a dot is 3 pixels in diameter, a given column will be valid for 171 pixel rows (3*57). As a byte contains 2 pixels, the number of bytes valid in each buffered read (4 cache lines) will be a worst case of 86 (out of 128 read).

Once the bit has been detected it must be written out to DRAM. We store the bits from 8 columns as a set of contiguous bytes to minimize DRAM delay. Since all the bits from a given dot column will correspond to the next bit position in a data byte, we can read the old value for the byte, shift and OR in the new bit, and write the byte back. The read/shift&OR/write process requires 2 cache lines.

We need to read and write the bit history for the given row as we update it. We only require 3 bits of history per row, allowing the storage of 2 rows of history in a single byte. The read/shift&OR/write process requires 2 cache lines.

The total bandwidth required for the bit detection and storage is summarised in the following table:

Read centroid Δ
5%

Read 3 columns of pixel data
19%

Read/Write detected bits into byte buffer
10%

Read/Write bit history
5%

TOTAL
39%

Detecting a Dot

The process of detecting the value of a dot (and hence the value of a bit) given a centroid is accomplished by examining 3 pixel values and getting the result from a lookup table. The process is fairly simple and is illustrated in FIG. 42. A dot 290 has a radius of about 1.5 pixels. Therefore the pixel 291 that holds the centroid, regardless of the actual position of the centroid within that pixel, should be 100% of the dot's value. If the centroid is exactly in the center of the pixel 291, then the pixels above 292 & below 293 the centroid's pixel, as well as the pixels to the left 294 & right 295 of the centroid's pixel will contain a majority of the dot's value. The further a centroid is away from the exact center of the pixel 295, the more likely that more than the center pixel will have 100% coverage by the dot.

Although FIG. 42 only shows centroids differing to the left and below the center, the same relationship obviously holds for centroids above and to the right of center. In Case 1, the centroid is exactly in the center of the middle pixel 295. The center pixel 295 is completely covered by the dot, and the pixels above, below, left, and right are also well covered by the dot. In Case 2, the centroid is to the left of the center of the middle pixel 291. The center pixel is still completely covered by the dot, and the pixel 294 to the left of the center is now completely covered by the dot. The pixels above 292 and below 293 are still well covered. In Case 3, the centroid is below the center of the middle pixel 291. The center pixel 291 is still completely covered by the dot 291, and the pixel below center is now completely covered by the dot. The pixels left 294 and right 295 of center are still well covered. In Case 4, the centroid is left and below the center of the middle pixel. The center pixel 291 is still completely covered by the dot, and both the pixel to the left of center 294 and the pixel below center 293 are completely covered by the dot.

The algorithm for updating the centroid uses the distance of the centroid from the center of the middle pixel 291 in order to select 3 representative pixels and thus decide the value of the dot:

Pixel 1: the pixel containing the centroid

Pixel 2: the pixel to the left of Pixel 1 if the centroid's X coordinate (column value) is <½, otherwise the pixel to the right of Pixel 1.

Pixel 3: the pixel above pixel 1 if the centroid's Y coordinate (row value) is <½, otherwise the pixel below Pixel 1.

As shown in FIG. 43, the value of each pixel is output to a pre-calculated lookup table 301. The 3 pixels are fed into a 12-bit lookup table, which outputs a single bit indicating the value of the dot—on or off. The lookup table 301 is constructed at chip definition time, and can be compiled into about 500 gates. The lookup table can be a simple threshold table, with the exception that the center pixel (Pixel 1) is weighted more heavily.

Step 3: Update the Centroid as for Each Row in the Column

The idea of the Δs processing is to use the previous bit history to generate a ‘perfect’ dot at the expected centroid location for each row in a current column. The actual pixels (from the CCD) are compared with the expected ‘perfect’ pixels. If the two match, then the actual centroid location must be exactly in the expected position, so the centroid Δs must be valid and not need updating. Otherwise a process of changing the centroid Δs needs to occur in order to best fit the expected centroid location to the actual data. The new centroid Δs will be used for processing the dot in the next column.

Updating the centroid Δs is done as a subsequent process from Step 2 for the following reasons:

to reduce complexity in design, so that it can be performed as Step 2 of Phase 1 there is enough bandwidth remaining to allow it to allow reuse of DRAM buffers, and

to ensure that all the data required for centroid updating is available at the start of the process without special pipelining.

The centroid Δ are processed as Δcolumn Δrow respectively to reduce complexity.

Although a given dot is 3 pixels in diameter, it is likely to occur in a 4×4 pixel area. However the edge of one dot will as a result be in the same pixel as the edge of the next dot. For this reason, centroid updating requires more than simply the information about a given single dot.

FIG. 44 shows a single dot 310 from the previous column with a given centroid 311. In this example, the dot 310 extend Δ over 4 pixel columns 312-315 and in fact, part of the previous dot column's dot (coordinate=(Prevcolumn, Current Row)) has entered the current column for the dot on the current row. If the dot in the current row and column was white, we would expect the rightmost pixel column 314 from the previous dot column to be a low value, since there is only the dot information from the previous column's dot (the current column's dot is white). From this we can see that the higher the pixel value is in this pixel column 315, the more the centroid should be to the right Of course, if the dot to the right was also black, we cannot adjust the centroid as we cannot get information sub-pixel. The same can be said for the dots to the left, above and below the dot at dot coordinates (PrevColumn, CurrentRow).

From this we can say that a maximum of 5 pixel columns and rows are required. It is possible to simplify the situation by taking the cases of row and column centroid Δs separately, treating them as the same problem, only rotated 90 degrees.

Taking the horizontal case first, it is necessary to change the column centroid Δs if the expected pixels don't match the detected pixels. From the bit history, the value of the bits found for the Current Row in the current dot column, the previous dot column, and the (previous−1)th dot column are known. The expected centroid location is also known. Using these two pieces of information, it is possible to generate a 20 bit expected bit pattern should the read be ‘perfect’. The 20 bit bit-pattern represents the expected Δ values for each of the 5 pixels across the horizontal dimension. The first nibble would represent the rightmost pixel of the leftmost dot. The next 3 nibbles represent the 3 pixels across the center of the dot 310 from the previous column, and the last nibble would be the leftmost pixel 317 of the rightmost dot (from the current column).

If the expected centroid is in the center of the pixel, we would expect a 20 bit pattern based on the following table:

Bit history
Expected pixels

000
00000

001
0000D

010
0DFD0

011
0DFDD

100
D0000

101
D000D

110
DDFD0

111
DDFDD

The pixels to the left and right of the center dot are either 0 or D depending on whether the bit was a 0 or 1 respectively. The center three pixels are either 000 or DFD depending on whether the bit was a 0 or 1 respectively. These values are based on the physical area taken by a dot for a given pixel. Depending on the distance of the centroid from the exact center of the pixel, we would expect data shifted slightly, which really only affects the pixels either side of the center pixel. Since there are 16 possibilities, it is possible to divide the distance from the center by 16 and use that amount to shift the expected pixels.

Once the 20 bit 5 pixel expected value has been determined it can be compared against the actual pixels read. This can proceed by subtracting the expected pixels from the actual pixels read on a pixel by pixel basis, and finally adding the differences together to obtain a distance from the expected A values.

FIG. 45 illustrates one form of implementation of the above algorithm which includes a look up table 320 which receives the bit history 322 and central fractional component 323 and outputs 324 the corresponding 20 bit number which is subtracted 321 from the central pixel input 326 to produce a pixel difference 327.

This process is carried out for the expected centroid and once for a shift of the centroid left and right by 1 amount in Δcolumn. The centroid with the smallest difference from the actual pixels is considered to be the ‘winner’ and the Δcolumn updated accordingly (which hopefully is ‘no change’). As a result, a Δcolumn cannot change by more than 1 each dot column.

The process is repeated for the vertical pixels, and Arow is consequentially updated.

There is a large amount of scope here for parallelism. Depending on the rate of the clock chosen for the ACP unit 31 these units can be placed in series (and thus the testing of 3 different Δ could occur in consecutive clock cycles), or in parallel where all 3 can be tested simultaneously. If the clock rate is fast enough, there is less need for parallelism.

Bandwidth Utilization

It is necessary to read the old Δ of the Δs, and to write them out again. This takes 10% of the bandwidth:

2*(76(3150/32)+2*3150)=27,648 ns=10% of bandwidth

It is necessary to read the bit history for the given row as we update its Δs. Each byte contains 2 row's bit histories, thus taking 2.5% of the bandwidth:

76((3150/2)/32)+2*(3150/2)=4,085 ns=2.5% of bandwidth

In the worst case of pixel drift due to a 1% rotation, centroids will shift 1 column every 57 pixel rows, but since a dot is 3 pixels in diameter, a given pixel column will be valid for 171 pixel rows (3*57). As a byte contains 2 pixels, the number of bytes valid in cached reads will be a worst case of 86 (out of 128 read). The worst case timing for 5 columns is therefore 31% bandwidth.

5*(((9450/(128*2))*320)*128/86)=88, 112 ns=31% of bandwidth.

The total bandwidth required for the updating the centroid Δ is summarised in the following table:

Read/Write centroid Δ
10%

Read bit history
2.5%

Read 5 columns of pixel data
31%

TOTAL
43.5%

Memory Usage for Phase 2:

The 2 MB bit-image DRAM area is read from and written to during Phase 2 processing. The 2 MB pixel-data DRAM area is read.

The 0.5 MB scratch DRAM area is used for storing row data, namely:

Centroid array
24bits (16:8) * 2 * 3150 = 18,900 byes

Bit History array
3 bits * 3150 entries (2 per byte) = 1575 bytes

Phase 3—Unscramble and XOR the Raw Data

Returning to FIG. 37, the next step in decoding is to unscramble and XOR the raw data. The 2 MB byte image, as taken from the Artcard, is in a scrambled XORed form. It must be unscrambled and re-XORed to retrieve the bit image necessary for the Reed Solomon decoder in phase 4.

Turning to FIG. 46, the unscrambling process 330 takes a 2 MB scrambled byte image 331 and writes an unscrambled 2 MB image 332. The process cannot reasonably be performed in-place, so 2 sets of 2 MB areas are utilised. The scrambled data 331 is in symbol block order arranged in a 16×16 array, with symbol block 0 (334) having all the symbol 0's from all the code words in random order. Symbol block 1 has all the symbol 1's from all the code words in random order etc. Since there are only 255 symbols, the 256^thsymbol block is currently unused.

A linear feedback shift register is used to determine the relationship between the position within a symbol block eg. 334 and what code word eg. 355 it came from. This works as long as the same seed is used when generating the original Artcard images. The XOR of bytes from alternative source lines with 0xAA and 0x55 respectively is effectively free (in time) since the bottleneck of time is waiting for the DRAM to be ready to read/write to non-sequential addresses.

The timing of the unscrambling XOR process is effectively 2 MB of random byte-reads, and 2 MB of random byte-writes i.e. 2*(2 MB*76 ns+2 MB*2 ns)=327,155,712 ns or approximately 0.33 seconds. This timing assumes no caching.

Phase 4—Reed Solomon Decode

This phase is a loop, iterating through copies of the data in the bit image, passing them to the Reed-Solomon decode module until either a successful decode is made or until there are no more copies to attempt decode from.

The Reed-Solomon decoder used can be the VLIW processor, suitably programmed or, alternatively, a separate hardwired core such as LSI Logic's L64712. The L64712 has a throughput of 50 Mbits per second (around 6.25 MB per second), so the time may be bound by the speed of the Reed-Solomon decoder rather than the 2 MB read and 1 MB write memory access time (500 MB/sec for sequential accesses). The time taken in the worst case is thus 2/6.25 s=approximately 0.32 seconds. Of course, other artcard formats are possible.

Phase 5 Running the Vark Script

The overall time taken to read the Artcard 9 and decode it is therefore approximately 2.15 seconds. The apparent delay to the user is actually only 0.65 seconds (the total of Phases 3 and 4), since the Artcard stops moving after 1.5 seconds.

Once the Artcard is loaded, the Artvark script must be interpreted, Rather than run the script immediately, the script is only run upon the pressing of the ‘Print’ button 13 (FIG. 1). The taken to run the script will vary depending on the complexity of the script, and must be taken into account for the perceived delay between pressing the print button and the actual print button and the actual printing.

As noted previously, the VLIW processor 74 is a digital processing system that accelerates computationally expensive Vark functions. The balance of functions performed in software by the CPU core 72, and in hardware by the VLIW processor 74 will be implementation dependent. The goal of the VLIW processor 74 is to assist all Artcard styles to execute in a time that does not seem too slow to the user. As CPUs become faster and more powerful, the number of functions requiring hardware acceleration becomes less and less. The VLIW processor has a microcoded ALU sub-system that allows general hardware speed up of the following time-critical functions.

1) Image access mechanisms for general software processing
2) Image convolver.
3) Data driven image warper
4) Image scaling
5) Image tessellation
6) Affine transform
7) Image compositor
8) Color space transform
9) Histogram collector
10) Illumination of the Image
11) Brush stamper
12) Histogram collector
13) CCD image to internal image conversion
14) Construction of image pyramids (used by warper & for brushing)

The following table summarizes the time taken for each Vark operation if implemented in the ALU model. The method of implementing the function using the ALU model is described hereinafter.

Speed of
1500 * 1000 image

Operation
Operation
1 channel
3 channels

Image composite
1 cycle per output
0.015
s
0.045
s

pixel

Image convolve
k/3 cycles per

output pixel

(k = kernel size)

3 × 3 convolve
0.045
s
0.135
s

5 × 5 convolve
0.125
s
0.375
s

7 × 7 convolve
0.245
s
0.735
s

Image warp
8 cycles per pixel
0.120
s
0.360
s

Histogram collect
2 cycles per pixel
0.030
s
0.090
s

Image Tessellate
⅓ cycle per pixel
0.005
s
0.015
s

Image sub-pixel
1 cycle per output
—
—

Translate
pixel

Color lookup replace
½ cycle per pixel
0.008
s
0.023

Color space transform
8 cycles per pixel
0.120
s
0.360
s

Convert CCD image
4 cycles per output
0.06
s
0.18
s

to internal image
pixel

(including color

convert & scale)

Construct image
1 cycle per input
0.015
s
0.045
s

pyramid
pixel

Scale
Maximum of:
0.015
s
0.045
s

2 cycles per input
(minimum)
(minimum)

pixel

2 cycles per output

pixel

2 cycles per output

pixel (scaled in X

only)

Affine transform
2 cycles per output
0.03
s
0.09
s

pixel

Brush rotate/translate
?

and composite

Tile Image
4-8 cycles per
0.015 s to
0.060 s to

output pixel
0.030 s
0.120 s

to for 4

channels

(Lab, texture)

Illuminate image
Cycles per pixel

Ambient only
½
0.008
s
0.023
s

Directional light
1
0.015
s
0.045
s

Directional (bm)
6
0.09
s
0.27
s

Omni light
6
0.09
s
0.27
s

Omni (bm)
9
0.137
s
0.41
s

Spotlight
9
0.137
s
0.41
s

Spotlight (bm)
12
0.18
s
0.54
s

(bm) = bumpmap

For example, to convert a CCD image, collect histogram & perform lookup-color replacement (for image enhancement) takes: 9+2+0.5 cycles per pixel, or 11.5 cycles. For a 1500×1000 image that is 172,500,000, or approximately 0.2 seconds per component, or 0.6 seconds for all 3 components. Add a simple warp, and the total comes to 0.6+0.36, almost 1 second.

Image Convolver

A convolve is a weighted average around a center pixel. The average may be a simple sum, a sum of absolute values, the absolute value of a sum, or sums truncated at 0.

The image convolver is a general-purpose convolver, allowing a variety of functions to be implemented by varying the values within a variable-sized coefficient kernel. The kernel sizes supported are 3×3, 5×5 and 7×7 only.

Turning now to FIG. 82, there is illustrated 340 an example of the convolution process. The pixel component values fed into the convolver process 341 come from a Box Read Iterator 342. The Iterator 342 provides the image data row by row, and within each row, pixel by pixel. The output from the convolver 341 is sent to a Sequential Write Iterator 344, which stores the resultant image in a valid image format.

A Coefficient Kernel 346 is a lookup table in DRAM. The kernel is arranged with coefficients in the same order as the Box Read Iterator 342. Each coefficient entry is 8 bits. A simple Sequential Read Iterator can be used to index into the kernel 346 and thus provide the coefficients. It simulates an image with ImageWidth equal to the kernel size, and a Loop option is set so that the kernel would continuously be provided.

One form of implementation of the convolve process on an ALU unit is as illustrated in FIG. 81. The following constants are set by software:

Constant
Value

K₁
Kernel size (9, 25, or 49)

The control logic is used to count down the number of multiply/adds per pixel. When the count (accumulated in Latch₂) reaches 0, the control signal generated is used to write out the current convolve value (from Latch₁) and to reset the count. In this way, one control logic block can be used for a number of parallel convolve streams.

Each cycle the multiply ALU can perform one multiply/add to incorporate the appropriate part of a pixel. The number of cycles taken to sum up all the values is therefore the number of entries in the kernel. Since this is compute bound, it is appropriate to divide the image into multiple sections and process them in parallel on different ALU units.

On a 7×7 kernel, the time taken for each pixel is 49 cycles, or 490 ns. Since each cache line holds 32 pixels, the time available for memory access is 12,740 ns. ((32-7+1)×490 ns). The time taken to read 7 cache lines and write 1 is worse case 1,120 ns (8*140 ns, all accesses to same DRAM bank). Consequently it is possible to process up to 10 pixels in parallel given unlimited resources. Given a limited number of ALUs it is possible to do at best 4 in parallel. The time taken to therefore perform the convolution using a 7×7 kernel is 0.18375 seconds (1500*1000 *490 ns/4=183,750,000 ns).

On a 5×5 kernel, the time taken for each pixel is 25 cycles, or 250 ns. Since each cache line holds 32 pixels, the time available for memory access is 7,000 ns. ((32-5+1)×250 ns). The time taken to read 5 cache lines and write 1 is worse case 840 ns (6*140 ns, all accesses to same DRAM bank). Consequently it is possible to process up to 7 pixels in parallel given unlimited resources. Given a limited number of ALUs it is possible to do at best 4. The time taken to therefore perform the convolution using a 5×5 kernel is 0.09375 seconds (1500*1000 *250 ns/4=93,750,000 ns).

On a 3×3 kernel, the time taken for each pixel is 9 cycles, or 90 ns. Since each cache line holds 32 pixels, the time available for memory access is 2,700 ns. ((32−3+1)×90 ns). The time taken to read 3 cache lines and write 1 is worse case 560 ns (4*140 ns, all accesses to same DRAM bank). Consequently it is possible to process up to 4 pixels in parallel given unlimited resources. Given a limited number of ALUs and Read/Write Iterators it is possible to do at best 4. The time taken to therefore perform the convolution using a 3×3 kernel is 0.03375 seconds (1500*1000 *90 ns/4=33,750,000 ns).

Consequently each output pixel takes kernelsize/3 cycles to compute. The actual timings are summarised in the following table:

Time taken to
Time to process
Time to Process

calculate output
1 channel at
3 channels at

Kernel size
pixel
1500 × 1000
1500 × 1000

3 × 3 (9)
3
cycles
0.045 seconds
0.135 seconds

5 × 5 (25)
8 ⅓
cycles
0.125 seconds
0.375 seconds

7 × 7 (49)
16 1/3
cycles
0.245 seconds
0.735 seconds

Image Compositor

Compositing is to add a foreground image to a background image using a matte or a channel to govern the appropriate proportions of background and foreground in the final image. Two styles of compositing are preferably supported, regular compositing and associated compositing. The rules for the two styles are:

Regular composite: new Value=Foreground+(Background−Foreground)a
Associated composite: new value=Foreground+(1−a)Background

The difference then, is that with associated compositing, the foreground has been pre-multiplied with the matte, while in regular compositing it has not. An example of the compositing process is as illustrated in FIG. 83.

The alpha channel has values from 0 to 255 corresponding to the range 0 to 1.

Regular Composite

A regular composite is implemented as:

Foreground+(Background−Foreground)*α/255

The division by X/255 is approximated by 257×/65536. An implementation of the compositing process is shown in more detail in FIG. 84, where the following constant is set by software:

Constant
Value

K₁
257

Since 4 Iterators are required, the composite process takes 1 cycle per pixel, with a utilization of only half of the ALUs. The composite process is only run on a single channel. To composite a 3-channel image with another, the compositor must be run 3 times, once for each channel.

The time taken to composite a full size single channel is 0.015 s (1500*1000*1*10 ns), or 0.045 s to composite all 3 channels.

To approximate a divide by 255 it is possible to multiply by 257 and then divide by 65536. It can also be achieved by a single add (256*x+x) and ignoring (except for rounding purposes) the final 16 bits of the result.

As shown in FIG. 42, the compositor process requires 3 Sequential Read Iterators 351-353 and 1 Sequential Write Iterator 355, and is implemented as microcode using a Adder ALU in conjunction with a multiplier ALU. Composite time is 1 cycle (10 ns) per-pixel. Different microcode is required for associated and regular compositing, although the average time per pixel composite is the same.

The composite process is only run on a single channel. To composite one 3-channel image with another, the compositor must be run 3 times, once for each channel. As the a channel is the same for each composite, it must be read each time. However it should be noted that to transfer (read or write) 4×32 byte cache-lines in the best case takes 320 ns. The pipeline gives an average of 1 cycle per pixel composite, taking 32 cycles or 320 ns (at 100 MHz) to composite the 32 pixels, so the a channel is effectively read for free. An entire channel can therefore be composited in:

1500/32*1000*320 ns=15,040,000 ns=0.015 seconds.

The time taken to composite a full size 3 channel image is therefore 0.045 seconds.

Construct Image Pyramid

Several functions, such as warping, tiling and brushing, require the average value of a given area of pixels. Rather than calculate the value for each area given, these functions preferably make use of an image pyramid. As illustrated previously in FIG. 33, an image pyramid 360 is effectively a multi-resolution pixelmap. The original image is a 1:1 representation. Sub-sampling by 2:1 in each dimension produces an image ¼ the original size. This process continues until the entire image is represented by a single pixel.

An image pyramid is constructed from an original image, and consumes ⅓ of the size taken up by the original image (¼+ 1/16+ 1/64+ . . . ). For an original image of 1500×1000 the corresponding image pyramid is approximately ½ MB

The image pyramid can be constructed via a 3×3 convolve performed on 1 in 4 input image pixels advancing the center of the convolve kernel by 2 pixels each dimension. A 3×3 convolve results in higher accuracy than simply averaging 4 pixels, and has the added advantage that coordinates on different pyramid levels differ only by shifting 1 bit per level.

The construction of an entire pyramid relies on a software loop that calls the pyramid level construction function once for each level of the pyramid.

The timing to produce 1 level of the pyramid is 9/4 *¼ of the resolution of the input image since we are generating an image ¼ of the size of the original. Thus for a 1500×1000 image:

Timing to produce level 1 of pyramid= 9/4 *750 *500=843, 750 cycles

Timing to produce level 2 of pyramid= 9/4 *375 *250=210, 938 cycles

Timing to produce level 3 of pyramid= 9/4 *188 *125=52, 735 cycles Etc.

The total time is ¾ cycle per original image pixel (image pyramid is ⅓ of original image size, and each pixel takes 9/4 cycles to be calculated, i.e. ⅓ * 9/4=¾). In the case of a 1500×1000 image is 1,125,000 cycles (at 100 MHz), or 0.011 seconds. This timing is for a single color channel, 3 color channels require 0.034 seconds processing time.

General Data Driven Image Warper

The ACP 31 is able to carry out image warping manipulations of the input image. The principles of image warping are well-known in theory. One thorough text book reference on the process of warping is “Digital Image Warping” by George Wolberg published in 1990 by the IEEE Computer Society Press, Los Alamitos, Calif. The warping process utilizes a warp map which forms part of the data fed in via Artcard 9. The warp map can be arbitrarily dimensioned in accordance with requirements and provides information of a mapping of input pixels to output pixels. Unfortunately, the utilization of arbitrarily sized warp maps presents a number of problems which must be solved by the image warper.

Turning to FIG. 85, a warp map 365, having dimensions A×B comprises array values of a certain magnitude (for example 8 bit values from 0-255) which set out the coordinate of a theoretical input image which maps to the corresponding “theoretical” output image having the same array coordinate indices. Unfortunately, any output image eg. 366 will have its own dimensions C×D which may further be totally different from an input image which may have its own dimensions E×F. Hence, it is necessary to facilitate the remapping of the warp map 365 so that it can be utilised for output image 366 to determine, for each output pixel, the corresponding area or region of the input image 367 from which the output pixel color data is to be constructed. For each output pixel in output image 366 it is necessary to first determine a corresponding warp map value from warp map 365. This may include the need to bilinearly interpolate the surrounding warp map values when an output image pixel maps to a fractional position within warp map table 365. The result of this process will give the location of an input image pixel in a “theoretical” image which will be dimensioned by the size of each data value within the warp map 365. These values must be re-scaled so as to map the theoretical image to the corresponding actual input image 367.

In order to determine the actual value and output image pixel should take so as to avoid aliasing effects, adjacent output image pixels should be examined to determine a region of input image pixels 367 which will contribute to the final output image pixel value. In this respect, the image pyramid is utilised as will become more apparent hereinafter.

The image warper performs several tasks in order to warp an image.

- Scale the warp map to match the output image size.
- Determine the span of the region of input image pixels represented in each output pixel.
- Calculate the final output pixel value via tri-linear interpolation from the input image pyramid
  
  Scale Warp Map

As noted previously, in a data driven warp, there is the need for a warp map that describes, for each output pixel, the center of a corresponding input image map. Instead of having a single warp map as previously described, containing interleaved x and y value information, it is possible to treat the X and Y coordinates as separate channels.

Consequently, preferably there are two warp maps: an X warp map showing the warping of X coordinates, and a Y warp map, showing the warping of the Y coordinates. As noted previously, the warp map 365 can have a different spatial resolution than the image they being scaled (for example a 32×32 warp-map 365 may adequately describe a warp for a 1500×1000 image 366). In addition, the warp maps can be represented by 8 or 16 bit values that correspond to the size of the image being warped.

There are several steps involved in producing points in the input image space from a given warp map:

1. Determining the corresponding position in the warp map for the output pixel

2. Fetch the values from the warp map for the next step (this can require scaling in the resolution domain if the warp map is only 8 bit values)

3. Bi-linear interpolation of the warp map to determine the actual value

4. Scaling the value to correspond to the input image domain

The first step can be accomplished by multiplying the current X/Y coordinate in the output image by a scale factor (which can be different in X & Y). For example, if the output image was 1500×1000, and the warp map was 150×100, we scale both X & Y by 1/10.

Fetching the values from the warp map requires access to 2 Lookup tables. One Lookup table indexes into the X warp-map, and the other indexes into the Y warp-map. The lookup table either reads 8 or 16 bit entries from the lookup table, but always returns 16 bit values (clearing the high 8 bits if the original values are only 8 bits).

The next step in the pipeline is to bi-linearly interpolate the looked-up warp map values.

Finally the result from the bi-linear interpolation is scaled to place it in the same domain as the image to be warped. Thus, if the warp map range was 0-255, we scale X by 1500/255, and Y by 1000/255.

The interpolation process is as illustrated in FIG. 86 with the following constants set by software:

Constant
Value

K₁
Xscale (scales 0-ImageWidth to 0-WarpmapWidth)

K₂
Yscale (scales 0-ImageHeight to 0-WarpmapHeight)

K₃
XrangeScale (scales warpmap range (eg 0-255) to

0-ImageWidth)

K₄
YrangeScale (scales warpmap range (eg 0-255) to

0-ImageHeight)

The following lookup table is used:

Lookup
Size
Details

LU₁and
WarpmapWidth x
Warpmap lookup.

LU₂
WarpmapHeight
Given [X,Y] the 4 entries required for

bi-linear interpolation are returned. Even if

entries are only 8 bit, they are returned as 16

bit (high 8 bits 0). Transfer time is 4 entries at

2 bytes per entry. Total time is 8 cycles as

2 lookups are used.

Span Calculation

The points from the warp map 365 locate centers of pixel regions in the input image 367. The distance between input image pixels of adjacent output image pixels will indicate the size of the regions, and this distance can be approximated via a span calculation.

Turning to FIG. 87, for a given current point in the warp map P1, the previous point on the same line is called P0, and the previous line's point at the same position is called P2. We determine the absolute distance in X & Y between P1 and P0, and between P1 and P2. The maximum distance in X or Y becomes the span which will be a square approximation of the actual shape.

Preferably, the points are processed in a vertical strip output order, P0 is the previous point on the same line within a strip, and when P1 is the first point on line within a strip, then PO refers to the last point in the previous strip's corresponding line. P2 is the previous line's point in the same strip, so it can be kept in a 32-entry history buffer. The basic of the calculate span process are as illustrated in FIG. 88 with the details of the process as illustrated in FIG. 89.

The following DRAM FIFO is used:

Lookup
Size
Details

FIFO₁
8 ImageWidth bytes.
P2 history/lookup (both X & Y in same

[ImageWidth × 2
FIFO)

entries at 32 bits per
P1 is put into the FIFO and taken out again

entry]
at the same pixel on the following

row as P2.

Transfer time is 4 cycles

(2 × 32 bits, with 1 cycle per 16 bits)

Since a 32 bit precision span history is kept, in the case of a 1500 pixel wide image being warped 12,000 bytes temporary storage is required.

Calculation of the span 364 uses 2 Adder ALUs (1 for span calculation, 1 for looping and counting for P0 and P2 histories) takes 7 cycles as follows:

Cycle
Action

1
A = ABS(P1_x− P2_x)

Store P1_xin P2_xhistory

2
B = ABS(P1_x− P0_x

Store P1_xin P0_xhistory

3
A = MAX(A, B)

4
B = ABS(P1_y− P2_y)

Store P1_yin P2_yhistory

5
A = MAX(A, B)

6
B = ABS(P1_y− P0_y)

Store P1_yin P0_yhistory

7
A = MAX(A, B)

The history buffers 365, 366 are cached DRAM. The ‘Previous Line’ (for P2 history) buffer 366 is 32 entries of span-precision. The ‘Previous Point’ (for P0 history). Buffer 365 requires 1 register that is used most of the time (for calculation of points 1 to 31 of a line in a strip), and a DRAM buffered set of history values to be used in the calculation of point 0 in a strip's line.

32 bit precision in span history requires 4 cache lines to hold P2 history, and 2 for P0 history. P0's history is only written and read out once every 8 lines of 32 pixels to a temporary storage space of (ImageHeight*4) bytes. Thus a 1500 pixel high image being warped requires 6000 bytes temporary storage, and a total of 6 cache lines.

Tri-Linear Interpolation

Having determined the center and span of the area from the input image to be averaged, the final part of the warp process is to determine the value of the output pixel. Since a single output pixel could theoretically be represented by the entire input image, it is potentially too time-consuming to actually read and average the specific area of the input image contributing to the output pixel. Instead, it is possible to approximate the pixel value by using an image pyramid of the input image.

If the span is 1 or less, it is necessary only to read the original image's pixels around the given coordinate, and perform bi-linear interpolation. If the span is greater than 1, we must read two appropriate levels of the image pyramid and perform tri-linear interpolation. Performing linear interpolation between two levels of the image pyramid is not strictly correct, but gives acceptable results (it ens on the side of blurring the resultant image).

Turning to FIG. 90, generally speaking, for a given span ‘s’, it is necessary to read image pyramid levels given by ln₂s (370) and ln₂s+1 (371). Ln₂s is simply decoding the highest set bit of s. We must bi-linear interpolate to determine the value for the pixel value on each of the two levels 370,371 of the pyramid, and then interpolate between levels.

As shown in FIG. 91, it is necessary to first interpolate in X and Y for each pyramid level before interpolating between the pyramid levels to obtain a final output value 373.

The image pyramid address mode issued to generate addresses for pixel coordinates at (x, y) on pyramid level s & s+1. Each level of the image pyramid contains pixels sequential in x. Hence, reads in x are likely to be cache hits.

Reasonable cache coherence can be obtained as local regions in the output image are typically locally coherent in the input image (perhaps at a different scale however, but coherent within the scale). Since it is not possible to know the relationship between the input and output images, we ensure that output pixels are written in a vertical strip (via a Vertical-Strip Iterator) in order to best make use of cache coherence.

Tri-linear interpolation can be completed in as few as 2 cycles on average using 4 multiply ALUs and all 4 adder ALUs as a pipeline and assuming no memory access required. But since all the interpolation values are derived from the image pyramids, interpolation speed is completely dependent on cache coherence (not to mention the other units are busy doing warp-map scaling and span calculations). As many cache lines as possible should therefore be available to the image-pyramid reading. The best speed will be 8 cycles, using 2 Multiply ALUs.

The output pixels are written out to the DRAM via a Vertical-Strip Write Iterator that uses 2 cache lines. The speed is therefore limited to a minimum of 8 cycles per output pixel. If the scaling of the warp map requires 8 or fewer cycles, then the overall speed will be unchanged. Otherwise the throughput is the time taken to scale the warp map. In most cases the warp map will be scaled up to match the size of the photo.

Assuming a warp map that requires 8 or fewer cycles per pixel to scale, the time taken to convert a single color component of image is therefore 0.12 s (1500*1000*8 cycles*10 ns per cycle).

Histogram Collector

The histogram collector is a microcode program that takes an image channel as input, and produces a histogram as output. Each of a channel's pixels has a value in the range 0-255. Consequently there are 256 entries in the histogram table, each entry 32 bits—large enough to contain a count of an entire 1500×1000 image.

As shown in FIG. 92, since the histogram represents a summary of the entire image, a Sequential Read Iterator 378 is sufficient for the input. The histogram itself can be completely cached, requiring 32 cache lines (1K).

The microcode has two passes: an initialization pass which sets all the counts to zero, and then a “count” stage that increments the appropriate counter for each pixel read from the image. The first stage requires the Address Unit and a single Adder ALU, with the address of the histogram table 377 for initialising.

Relative Microcode
Address Unit

Address
A = Base address of histogram
Adder Unit 1

0
Write 0 to
Out1 = A

A + (Adder1.Out1 << 2)
A = A − 1

BNZ 0

1
Rest of processing
Rest of processing

The second stage processes the actual pixels from the image, and uses 4 Adder ALUs:

Adder 1
Adder 2
Adder 3
Adder 4
Address Unit

1
A = 0

A = −1

2
Out1 = A
A =
A =
A = A + 1
Out1 = Read 4

BZ
A = pixel
Adder1.Out1
Adr.Out1

bytes from: (A +

2

Z = pixel −

(Adder1.Out1 <<

Adder1.Out1

2))

3

Out1 = A
Out1 = A
Out1 = A
Write

A =
Adder4.Out1

Adder3.Out1
to: (A +

(Adder2.Out <<

2)

4

Write

Adder4.Out1 to:

(A +

(Adder2.Out <<

2) Flush caches

The Zero flag from Adder2 cycle 2 is used to stay at microcode address 2 for as long as the input pixel is the same. When it changes, the new count is written out in microcode address 3, and processing resumes at microcode address 2. Microcode address 4 is used at the end, when there are no more pixels to be read.

Stage 1 takes 256 cycles, or 2560 ns. Stage 2 varies according to the values of the pixels. The worst case time for lookup table replacement is 2 cycles per image pixel if every pixel is not the same as its neighbor. The time taken for a single color lookup is 0.03 s (1500×1000×2 cycle per pixel×10 ns per cycle=30,000,000 ns). The time taken for 3 color components is 3 times this amount, or 0.09 s.

Color Transform

Color transformation is achieved in two main ways:

Lookup table replacement

Color space conversion

Lookup Table Replacement

As illustrated in FIG. 86, one of the simplest ways to transform the color of a pixel is to encode an arbitrarily complex transform function into a lookup table 380. The component color value of the pixel is used to lookup 381 the new component value of the pixel. For each pixel read from a Sequential Read Iterator, its new value is read from the New Color Table 380, and written to a Sequential Write Iterator 383. The input image can be processed simultaneously in two halves to make effective use of memory bandwidth. The following lookup table is used:

Lookup
Size
Details

LU₁
256 entries
Replacement[X]

8 bits per
Table indexed by the 8 highest significant bits

entry
of X. Resultant 8 bits treated as fixed point 0:8

The total process requires 2 Sequential Read Iterators and 2 Sequential Write iterators. The 2 New Color Tables require 8 cache lines each to hold the 256 bytes (256 entries of 1 byte).

The average time for lookup table replacement is therefore ½ cycle per image pixel. The time taken for a single color lookup is 0.0075 s (1500×1000×½ cycle per pixel×10 ns per cycle=7,500,000 ns). The time taken for 3 color components is 3 times this amount, or 0.0225 s. Each color component has to be processed one after the other under control of software.

Color Space Conversion

Color Space conversion is only required when moving between color spaces. The CCD images are captured in RGB color space, and printing occurs in CMY color space, while clients of the ACP 31 likely process images in the Lab color space. All of the input color space channels are typically required as input to determine each output channel's component value. Thus the logical process is as illustrated 385 in FIG. 94.

Simply, conversion between Lab, RGB, and CMY is fairly straightforward. However the individual color profile of a particular device can vary considerably. Consequently, to allow future CCDs, inks, and printers, the ACP 31 performs color space conversion by means of tri-linear interpolation from color space conversion lookup tables.

Color coherence tends to be area based rather than line based. To aid cache coherence during tri-linear interpolation lookups, it is best to process an image in vertical strips. Thus the read 386-388 and write 389 iterators would be Vertical-Strip Iterators.

Tri-Linear Color Space Conversion

For each output color component, a single 3D table mapping the input color space to the output color component is required. For example, to convert CCD images from RGB to Lab, 3 tables calibrated to the physical characteristics of the CCD are required:

RGB->L

RGB->a

RGB->b

To convert from Lab to CMY, 3 tables calibrated to the physical characteristics of the ink/printer are required:

Lab->C

Lab->M

Lab->Y

The 8-bit input color components are treated as fixed-point numbers (3:5) in order to index into the conversion tables. The 3 bits of integer give the index, and the 5 bits of fraction are used for interpolation. Since 3 bits gives 8 values, 3 dimensions gives 512 entries (8×8×8). The size of each entry is 1 byte, requiring 512 bytes per table.

The Convert Color Space process can therefore be implemented as shown in FIG. 95 and the following lookup table is used:

Lookup
Size
Details

LU₁
8 × 8 × 8 entries
Convert[X, Y, Z]

512 entries
Table indexed by the 3 highest bits of X, Y, and Z.

8 bits per entry
8 entries returned from Tri-linear index address unit

Resultant 8 bits treated as fixed point 8:0

Transfer time is 8 entries at 1 byte per entry

Tri-linear interpolation returns interpolation between 8 values. Each 8 bit value takes 1 cycle to be returned from the lookup, for a total of 8 cycles. The tri-linear interpolation also takes 8 cycles when 2 Multiply ALUs are used per cycle. General tri-linear interpolation information is given in the ALU section of this document. The 512 bytes for the lookup table fits in 16 cache lines.

The time taken to convert a single color component of image is therefore 0.105 s (1500*1000*7 cycles*10 ns per cycle). To convert 3 components takes 0.415 s. Fortunately, the color space conversion for printout takes place on the fly during printout itself, so is not a perceived delay.

If color components are converted separately, they must not overwrite their input color space components since all color components from the input color space are required for converting each component.

Since only 1 multiply unit is used to perform the interpolation, it is alternatively possible to do the entire Lab->CMY conversion as a single pass. This would require 3 Vertical-Strip Read Iterators, 3 Vertical-Strip Write Iterators, and access to 3 conversion tables simultaneously. In that case, it is possible to write back onto the input image and thus use no extra memory. However, access to 3 conversion tables equals ⅓ of the caching for each, that could lead to high latency for the overall process.

Affine Transform

Prior to compositing an image with a photo, it may be necessary to rotate, scale and translate it. If the image is only being translated, it can be faster to use a direct sub-pixel translation function. However, rotation, scale-up and translation can all be incorporated into a single affine transform.

A general affine transform can be included as an accelerated function. Affine transforms are limited to 2D, and if scaling down, input images should be pre-scaled via the Scale function. Having a general affine transform function allows an output image to be constructed one block at a time, and can reduce the time taken to perform a number of transformations on an image since all can be applied at the same time.

A transformation matrix needs to be supplied by the client—the matrix should be the inverse matrix of the transformation desired i.e. applying the matrix to the output pixel coordinate will give the input coordinate.

A 2D matrix is usually represented as a 3×3 array:

$[\begin{matrix} a & b & 0 \\ c & d & 0 \\ e & f & 1 \end{matrix}]$

Since the 3^rdcolumn is always[0, 0, 1] clients do not need to specify it. Clients instead specify a, b, c, d, e, and f.

Given a coordinate in the output image (x, y) whose top left pixel coordinate is given as (0, 0), the input coordinate is specified by: (ax+cy+e, bx+dy+f). Once the input coordinate is determined, the input image is sampled to arrive at the pixel value. Bi-linear interpolation of input image pixels is used to determine the value of the pixel at the calculated coordinate. Since affine transforms preserve parallel lines, images are processed in output vertical strips of 32 pixels wide for best average input image cache coherence.

Three Multiply ALUs are required to perform the bi-linear interpolation in 2 cycles. Multiply ALUs 1 and 2 do linear interpolation in X for lines Y and Y+1 respectively, and Multiply ALU 3 does linear interpolation in Y between the values output by Multiply ALUs 1 and 2.

As we move to the right across an output line in X, 2 Adder ALUs calculate the actual input image coordinates by adding ‘a’ to the current X value, and ‘b’ to the current Y value respectively. When we advance to the next line (either the next line in a vertical strip after processing a maximum of 32 pixels, or to the first line in a new vertical strip) we update X and Y to pre-calculated start coordinate values constants for the given block

The process for calculating an input coordinate is given in FIG. 96 where the following constants are set by software:

Calculate Pixel

Once we have the input image coordinates, the input image must be sampled. A lookup table is used to return the values at the specified coordinates in readiness for bilinear interpolation. The basic process is as indicated in FIG. 97 and the following lookup table is used:

Lookup
Size
Details

LU₁
Image
Bilinear Image lookup [X, Y]

width by
Table indexed by the integer part of X and Y.

Image
4 entries returned from Bilinear index address unit,

height
2 per cycle.

8 bits per
Each 8 bit entry treated as fixed point 8:0

entry
Transfer time is 2 cycles (2 16 bit entries in FIFO

hold the 48 bit entries)

The affine transform requires all 4 Multiply Units and all 4 Adder ALUs, and with good cache coherence can perform an affine transform with an average of 2 cycles per output pixel. This timing assumes good cache coherence, which is true for non-skewed images. Worst case timings are severely skewed images, which meaningful Vark scripts are unlikely to contain.

The time taken to transform a 128×128 image is therefore 0.00033 seconds (32,768 cycles). If this is a clip image with 4 channels (including a channel), the total time taken is 0.00131 seconds (131,072 cycles).

A Vertical-Strip Write Iterator is required to output the pixels. No Read Iterator is required. However, since the affine transform accelerator is bound by time taken to access input image pixels, as many cache lines as possible should be allocated to the read of pixels from the input image. At least 32 should be available, and preferably 64 or more.

Scaling

Scaling is essentially a re-sampling of an image. Scale up of an image can be performed using the Affine Transform function. Generalized scaling of an image, including scale down, is performed by the hardware accelerated Scale function. Scaling is performed independently in X and Y, so different scale factors can be used in each dimension.

The generalized scale unit must match the Affine Transform scale function in terms of registration. The generalized scaling process is as illustrated in FIG. 98. The scale in X is accomplished by Fant's re-sampling algorithm as illustrated in FIG. 99.

Where the following constants are set by software:

Constant
Value

K₁
Number of input pixels that contribute to an output pixel in X

K₂
1/K₁

The following registers are used to hold temporary variables:

Variable
Value

Latch₁
Amount of input pixel remaining unused (starts at 1 and

decrements)

Latch₂
Amount of input pixels remaining to contribute to current

output pixel (starts at K₁and decrements)

Latch₃
Next pixel (in X)

Latch₄
Current pixel

Latch₅
Accumulator for output pixel (unscaled)

Latch₆
Pixel Scaled in X (output)

The Scale in Y process is illustrated in FIG. 100 and is also accomplished by a slightly altered version of Fant's re-sampling algorithm to account for processing in order of X pixels.

Where the following constants are set by software:

Constant
Value

K₁
Number of input pixels that contribute to an output pixel in Y

K₂
1/K₁

The following registers are used to hold temporary variables:

Variable
Value

Latch₁
Amount of input pixel remaining unused (starts at 1 and

decrements)

Latch₂
Amount of input pixels remaining to contribute to current

output pixel (starts at K₁and decrements)

Latch₃
Next pixel (in Y)

Latch₄
Current pixel

Latch₅
Pixel Scaled in Y (output)

The following DRAM FIFOs are used:

Lookup
Size
Details

FIFO₁
ImageWidth_OUTentries
1 row of image pixels already scaled in

8 bits per entry
X

1 cycle transfer time

FIFO₂
ImageWidth_OUTentries
1 row of image pixels already scaled in

16 bits per entry
X

2 cycles transfer time (1 byte per cycle)

Tessellate Image

Tessellation of an image is a form of tiling. It involves copying a specially designed “tile” multiple times horizontally and vertically into a second (usually larger) image space. When tessellated, the small tile forms a seamless picture. One example of this is a small tile of a section of a brick wall. It is designed so that when tessellated, it forms a full brick wall. Note that there is no scaling or sub-pixel translation involved in tessellation.

The most cache-coherent way to perform tessellation is to output the image sequentially line by line, and to repeat the same line of the input image for the duration of the line. When we finish the line, the input image must also advance to the next line (and repeat it multiple times across the output line).

An overview of the tessellation function is illustrated 390 in FIG. 101. The Sequential Read Iterator 392 is set up to continuously read a single line of the input tile (StartLine would be 0 and EndLine would be 1). Each input pixel is written to all 3 of the Write Iterators 393-395. A counter 397 in an Adder ALU counts down the number of pixels in an output line, terminating the sequence at the end of the line.

At the end of processing a line, a small software routine updates the Sequential Read Iterator's

StartLine and EndLine registers before restarting the microcode and the Sequential Read Iterator (which clears the FIFO and repeats line 2 of the tile). The Write Iterators 393-395 are not updated, and simply keep on writing out to their respective parts of the output image. The net effect is that the tile has one line repeated across an output line, and then the tile is repeated vertically too.

This process does not fully use the memory bandwidth since we get good cache coherence in the input image, but it does allow the tessellation to function with tiles of any size. The process uses 1 Adder ALU. If the 3 Write Iterators 393-395 each write to ⅓ of the image (breaking the image on tile sized boundaries), then the entire tessellation process takes place at an average speed of ⅓ cycle per output image pixel. For an image of 1500×1000, this equates to 0.005 seconds (5,000,000 ns).

Sub-pixel Translator

Before compositing an image with a background, it may be necessary to translate it by a sub-pixel amount in both X and Y. Sub-pixel transforms can increase an image's size by 1 pixel in each dimension. The value of the region outside the image can be client determined, such as a constant value (e.g. black), or edge pixel replication. Typically it will be better to use black.

The sub-pixel translation process is as illustrated in FIG. 102. Sub-pixel translation in a given dimension is defined by:

Pixel_out=Pixel_in*(1−Translation)+Pixel_in-1*Translation

It can also be represented as a form of interpolation:

Pixel_out=Pixel_in-1+(Pixel_in−Pixel_in-1)*Translation

Implementation of a single (on average) cycle interpolation engine using a single Multiply ALU and a single Adder ALU in conjunction is straightforward. Sub-pixel translation in both X & Y requires 2 interpolation engines.

In order to sub-pixel translate in Y, 2 Sequential Read Iterators 400, 401 are required (one is reading a line ahead of the other from the same image), and a single Sequential Write Iterator 403 is required.

The first interpolation engine (interpolation in Y) accepts pairs of data from 2 streams, and linearly interpolates between them. The second interpolation engine (interpolation in X) accepts its data as a single 1 dimensional stream and linearly interpolates between values. Both engines interpolate in 1 cycle on average.

Each interpolation engine 405, 406 is capable of performing the sub-pixel translation in 1 cycle per output pixel on average. The overall time is therefore 1 cycle per output pixel, with requirements of 2 Multiply ALUs and 2 Adder ALUs.

The time taken to output 32 pixels from the sub-pixel translate function is on average 320 ns (32 cycles). This is enough time for 4 full cache-line accesses to DRAM, so the use of 3 Sequential Iterators is well within timing limits.

The total time taken to sub-pixel translate an image is therefore 1 cycle per pixel of the output image. A typical image to be sub-pixel translated is a tile of size 128 *128. The output image size is 129 *129. The process takes 129 *129 *10 ns=166,410 ns.

The Image Tiler function also makes use of the sub-pixel translation algorithm, but does not require the writing out of the sub-pixel-translated data, but rather processes it further.

Image Tiler

The high level algorithm for tiling an image is carried out in software. Once the placement of the tile has been determined, the appropriate colored tile must be composited. The actual compositing of each tile onto an image is carried out in hardware via the microcoded ALUs. Compositing a tile involves both a texture application and a color application to a background image. In some cases it is desirable to compare the actual amount of texture added to the background in relation to the intended amount of texture, and use this to scale the color being applied. In these cases the texture must be applied first.

Since color application functionality and texture application functionality are somewhat independent, they are separated into sub-functions.

The number of cycles per 4-channel tile composite for the different texture styles and coloring styles is summarised in the following table:

Constant
Pixel

color
color

Replace texture
4
4.75

25% background + tile texture
4
4.75

Average height algorithm
5
5.75

Average height algorithm with feedback
5.75
6.5

Tile Coloring and Compositing

A tile is set to have either a constant color (for the whole tile), or takes each pixel value from an input image. Both of these cases may also have feedback from a texturing stage to scale the opacity (similar to thinning paint).

The steps for the 4 cases can be summarised as:

- Sub-pixel translate the tile's opacity values,
- Optionally scale the tile's opacity (if feedback from texture application is enabled).
- Determine the color of the pixel (constant or from an image map).
- Composite the pixel onto the background image.

Each of the 4 cases is treated separately, in order to minimize the time taken to perform the function. The summary of time per color compositing style for a single color channel is described in the following table:

No feedback
Feedback from

from texture
texture

(cycles
(cycles per

Tiling color style
per pixel)
pixel)

Tile has constant color per pixel
1
2

Tile has per pixel color from input image
1.25
2

Constant Color

In this case, the tile has a constant color, determined by software. While the ACP 31 is placing down one tile, the software can be determining the placement and coloring of the next tile.

The color of the tile can be determined by bi-linear interpolation into a scaled version of the image being tiled. The scaled version of the image can be created and stored in place of the image pyramid, and needs only to be performed once per entire tile operation. If the tile size is 128×128, then the image can be scaled down by 128:1 in each dimension.

Without Feedback

When there is no feedback from the texturing of a tile, the tile is simply placed at the specified coordinates. The tile color is used for each pixel's color, and the opacity for the composite comes from the tile's sub-pixel translated opacity channel. In this case color channels and the texture channel can be processed completely independently between tiling passes.

The overview of the process is illustrated in FIG. 103. Sub-pixel translation 410 of a tile can be accomplished using 2 Multiply ALUs and 2 Adder ALUs in an average time of 1 cycle per output pixel. The output from the sub-pixel translation is the mask to be used in compositing 411 the constant tile color 412 with the background image from background sequential Read Iterator.

Compositing can be performed using 1 Multiply ALU and 1 Adder ALU in an average time of 1 cycle per composite. Requirements are therefore 3 Multiply ALUs and 3 Adder ALUs. 4 Sequential Iterators 413-416 are required, taking 320 ns to read or write their contents. With an average number of cycles of 1 per pixel to sub-pixel translate and composite, there is sufficient time to read and write the buffers.

With Feedback

When there is feedback from the texturing of a tile, the tile is placed at the specified coordinates. The tile color is used for each pixel's color, and the opacity for the composite comes from the tile's sub-pixel translated opacity channel scaled by the feedback parameter. Thus the texture values must be calculated before the color value is applied.

The overview of the process is illustrated in FIG. 97. Sub-pixel translation of a tile can be accomplished using 2 Multiply ALUs and 2 Adder ALUs in an average time of 1 cycle per output pixel. The output from the sub-pixel translation is the mask to be scaled according to the feedback read from the Feedback Sequential Read Iterator 420. The feedback is passed it to a Scaler (1 Multiply ALU) 421.

Compositing 422 can be performed using 1 Multiply ALU and 1 Adder ALU in an average time of 1 cycle per composite. Requirements are therefore 4 Multiply ALUs and all 4 Adder ALUs. Although the entire process can be accomplished in 1 cycle on average, the bottleneck is the memory access, since 5 Sequential Iterators are required. With sufficient buffering, the average time is 1.25 cycles per pixel.

Color from Input Image

One way of coloring pixels in a tile is to take the color from pixels in an input image. Again, there are two possibilities for compositing: with and without feedback from the texturing.

Without Feedback

In this case, the tile color simply comes from the relative pixel in the input image. The opacity for compositing comes from the tile's opacity channel sub-pixel shifted.

The overview of the process is illustrated in FIG. 105. Sub-pixel translation 425 of a tile can be accomplished using 2 Multiply ALUs and 2 Adder ALUs in an average time of 1 cycle per output pixel. The output from the sub-pixel translation is the mask to be used in compositing 426 the tile's pixel color (read from the input image 428) with the background image 429.

Compositing 426 can be performed using 1 Multiply ALU and 1 Adder ALU in an average time of 1 cycle per composite. Requirements are therefore 3 Multiply ALUs and 3 Adder ALUs. Although the entire process can be accomplished in 1 cycle on average, the bottleneck is the memory access, since 5 Sequential Iterators are required. With sufficient buffering, the average time is 1.25 cycles per pixel.

With Feedback

In this case, the tile color still comes from the relative pixel in the input image, but the opacity for compositing is affected by the relative amount of texture height actually applied during the texturing pass. This process is as illustrated in FIG. 106.

Sub-pixel translation 431 of a tile can be accomplished using 2 Multiply ALUs and 2 Adder ALUs in an average time of 1 cycle per output pixel. The output from the sub-pixel translation is the mask to be scaled 431 according to the feedback read from the Feedback Sequential Read Iterator 432. The feedback is passed to a Scaler (1 Multiply ALU) 431.

Compositing 434 can be performed using 1 Multiply ALU and 1 Adder ALU in an average time of 1 cycle per composite.

Requirements are therefore all 4 Multiply ALUs and 3 Adder ALUs. Although the entire process can be accomplished in 1 cycle on average, the bottleneck is the memory access, since 6 Sequential Iterators are required. With sufficient buffering, the average time is 1.5 cycles per pixel.

Tile Texturing

Each tile has a surface texture defined by its texture channel. The texture must be sub-pixel translated and then applied to the output image. There are 3 styles of texture compositing:

- Replace texture
- 25% background+tile's texture
- Average height algorithm

In addition, the Average height algorithm can save feedback parameters for color compositing.

The time taken per texture compositing style is summarised in the following table:

Cycles per pixel
Cycles per pixel

(no feedback from
(feedback from

Tiling color style
texture)
texture)

Replace texture
1
—

25% background + tile texture value
1
—

Average height algorithm
2
2

Replace Texture

In this instance, the texture from the tile replaces the texture channel of the image, as illustrated in FIG. 107. Sub-pixel translation 436 of a tile's texture can be accomplished using 2 Multiply ALUs and 2 Adder ALUs in an average time of 1 cycle per output pixel. The output from this sub-pixel translation is fed directly to the Sequential Write Iterator 437.

The time taken for replace texture compositing is 1 cycle per pixel. There is no feedback, since 100% of the texture value is always applied to the background. There is therefore no requirement for processing the channels in any particular order.

25% Background+Tile's Texture

In this instance, the texture from the tile is added to 25% of the existing texture value. The new value must be greater than or equal to the original value. In addition, the new texture value must be clipped at 255 since the texture channel is only 8 bits. The process utilised is illustrated in FIG. 108.

Sub-pixel translation 440 of a tile's texture can be accomplished using 2 Multiply ALUs and 2 Adder ALUs in an average time of 1 cycle per output pixel. The output from this sub-pixel translation 440 is fed to an adder 441 where it is added to ¼ 442 of the background texture value. Min and Max functions 444 are provided by the 2 adders not used for sub-pixel translation and the output written to a Sequential Write Iterator 445.

The time taken for this style of texture compositing is 1 cycle per pixel. There is no feedback, since 100% of the texture value is considered to have been applied to the background (even if clipping at 255 occurred). There is therefore no requirement for processing the channels in any particular order.

Average Height Algorithm

In this texture application algorithm, the average height under the tile is computed, and each pixel's height is compared to the average height. If the pixel's height is less than the average, the stroke height is added to the background height. If the pixel's height is greater than or equal to the average, then the stroke height is added to the average height. Thus background peaks thin the stroke. The height is constrained to increase by a minimum amount to prevent the background from thinning the stroke application to 0 (the minimum amount can be 0 however). The height is also clipped at 255 due to the 8-bit resolution of the texture channel.

There can be feedback of the difference in texture applied versus the expected amount applied. The feedback amount can be used as a scale factor in the application of the tile's color.

In both cases, the average texture is provided by software, calculated by performing a bi-level interpolation on a scaled version of the texture map. Software determines the next tile's average texture height while the current tile is being applied. Software must also provide the minimum thickness for addition, which is typically constant for the entire tiling process.

Without Feedback

With no feedback, the texture is simply applied to the background texture, as shown in FIG. 109.

4 Sequential Iterators are required, which means that if the process can be pipelined for 1 cycle, the memory is fast enough to keep up.

Sub-pixel translation 450 of a tile's texture can be accomplished using 2 Multiply ALUs and 2 Adder ALUs in an average time of 1 cycle per output pixel. Each Min & Max function 451,452 requires a separate Adder ALU in order to complete the entire operation in 1 cycle. Since 2 are already used by the sub-pixel translation of the texture, there are not enough remaining for a 1 cycle average time.

The average time for processing 1 pixel's texture is therefore 2 cycles. Note that there is no feedback, and hence the color channel order of compositing is irrelevant.

With Feedback

This is conceptually the same as the case without feedback, except that in addition to the standard processing of the texture application algorithm, it is necessary to also record the proportion of the texture actually applied. The proportion can be used as a scale factor for subsequent compositing of the tile's color onto the background image. A flow diagram is illustrated in FIG. 110 and the following lookup table is used:

Lookup
Size
Details

LU₁
256 entries
1/N

16 bits per entry
Table indexed by N (range 0-255)

Resultant 16 bits treated as fixed point 0:16

Each of the 256 entries in the software provided 1/N table 460 is 16 bits, thus requiring 16 cache lines to hold continuously.

Sub-pixel translation 461 of a tile's texture can be accomplished using 2 Multiply ALUs and 2 Adder ALUs in an average time of 1 cycle per output pixel. Each Min 462 & Max 463 function requires a separate Adder ALU in order to complete the entire operation in 1 cycle. Since 2 are already used by the sub-pixel translation of the texture, there are not enough remaining for a 1 cycle average time.

The average time for processing 1 pixel's texture is therefore 2 cycles. Sufficient space must be allocated for the feedback data area (a tile sized image channel). The texture must be applied before the tile's color is applied, since the feedback is used in scaling the tile's opacity.

CCD Image Interpolator

Images obtained from the CCD via the ISI 83 (FIG. 3) are 750×500 pixels. When the image is captured via the ISI, the orientation of the camera is used to rotate the pixels by 0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees so that the top of the image corresponds to ‘up’. Since every pixel only has an R, G, or B color component (rather than all 3), the fact that these have been rotated must be taken into account when interpreting the pixel values. Depending on the orientation of the camera, each 2×2 pixel block has one of the configurations illustrated in FIG. 111:

Several processes need to be performed on the CCD captured image in order to transform it into a useful form for processing:

- Up-interpolation of low-sample rate color components in CCD image (interpreting correct orientation of pixels)
  
  Color Conversion from RGB to the Internal Color Space
- Scaling of the internal space image from 750×500 to 1500×1000.
- Writing out the image in a planar format

The entire channel of an image is required to be available at the same time in order to allow warping. In a low memory model (8 MB), there is only enough space to hold a single channel at full resolution as a temporary object. Thus the color conversion is to a single color channel. The limiting factor on the process is the color conversion, as it involves tri-linear interpolation from RGB to the internal color space, a process that takes 0.026 ns per channel (750×500×7 cycles per pixel×10 ns per cycle=26,250,000 ns).

It is important to perform the color conversion before scaling of the internal color space image as this reduces the number of pixels scaled (and hence the overall process time) by a factor of 4.

The requirements for all of the transformations may not fit in the ALU scheme. The transformations are therefore broken into two phases:

Phase 1: Up-interpolation of low-sample rate color components in CCD image (interpreting correct orientation of pixels)

Color conversion from RGB to the internal color space

Writing out the image in a planar format

Phase 2: Scaling of the internal space image from 750×500 to 1500×1000

Separating out the scale function implies that the small color converted image must be in memory at the same time as the large one. The output from Phase 1 (0.5 MB) can be safely written to the memory area usually kept for the image pyramid (1 MB). The output from Phase 2 can be the general expanded CCD image. Separation of the scaling also allows the scaling to be accomplished by the Affine Transform, and also allows for a different CCD resolution that may not be a simple 1:2 expansion.

Phase 1: Up-interpolation of low-sample rate color components.

Each of the 3 color components (R, G, and B) needs to be up interpolated in order for color conversion to take place for a given pixel. We have 7 cycles to perform the interpolation per pixel since the color conversion takes 7 cycles.

Interpolation of G is straightforward and is illustrated in FIG. 112. Depending on orientation, the actual pixel value G alternates between odd pixels on odd lines & even pixels on even lines, and odd pixels on even lines & even pixels on odd lines. In both cases, linear interpolation is all that is required. Interpolation of R and B components as illustrated in FIG. 113 and FIG. 113, is more complicated, since in the horizontal and vertical directions, as can be seen from the diagrams, access to 3 rows of pixels simultaneously is required, so 3 Sequential Read Iterators are required, each one offset by a single row. In addition, we have access to the previous pixel on the same row via a latch for each row.

Each pixel therefore contains one component from the CCD, and the other 2 up-interpolated. When one component is being bi-linearly interpolated, the other is being linearly interpolated. Since the interpolation factor is a constant 0.5, interpolation can be calculated by an add and a shift 1 bit right (in 1 cycle), and bi-linear interpolation of factor 0.5 can be calculated by 3 adds and a shift 2 bits right (3 cycles). The total number of cycles required is therefore 4, using a single multiply ALU.

FIG. 115 illustrates the case for rotation 0 even line even pixel (EL, EP), and odd line odd pixel (OL, OP) and FIG. 116 illustrates the case for rotation 0 even line odd pixel (EL, OP), and odd line even pixel (OL, EP). The other rotations are simply different forms of these two expressions.

Color Conversion

Color space conversion from RGB to Lab is achieved using the same method as that described in the general Color Space Convert function, a process that takes 8 cycles per pixel. Phase 1 processing can be described with reference to FIG. 117.

The up-interpolate of the RGB takes 4 cycles (1 Multiply ALU), but the conversion of the color space takes 8 cycles per pixel (2 Multiply ALUs) due to the lookup transfer time.

Phase 2

Scaling the Image

This phase is concerned with up-interpolating the image from the CCD resolution (750×500) to the working photo resolution (1500×1000). Scaling is accomplished by running the Affine transform with a scale of 1:2. The timing of a general affine transform is 2 cycles per output pixel, which in this case means an elapsed scaling time of 0.03 seconds.

Print Head 44

FIG. 153 illustrates the logical layout of a single print Head which logically consists of 8 segments, each printing bi-level cyan, magenta, and yellow onto a portion of the page.

Loading a Segment for Printing

Before anything can be printed, each of the 8 segments in the Print Head must be loaded with 6 rows of data corresponding to the following relative rows in the final output image:

Row 0=Line N, Yellow, even dots 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, . . .

Row 1=Line N+8, Yellow, odd dots 1, 3, 5, 7, . . .

Row 2=Line N+10, Magenta, even dots 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, . . .

Row 3=Line N+18, Magenta, odd dots 1, 3, 5, 7, . . .

Row 4=Line N+20, Cyan, even dots 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, . . .

Row 5=Line N+28, Cyan, odd dots 1, 3, 5, 7, . . .

Each of the segments prints dots over different parts of the page. Each segment prints 750 dots of one color, 375 even dots on one row, and 375 odd dots on another. The 8 segments have dots corresponding to positions:

Segment
First dot
Last dot

0
0
749

1
750
1499

2
1500
2249

3
2250
2999

4
3000
3749

5
3750
4499

6
4500
5249

7
5250
5999

Each dot is represented in the Print Head segment by a single bit. The data must be loaded 1 bit at a time by placing the data on the segment's BitValue pin, and clocked in to a shift register in the segment according to a BitClock. Since the data is loaded into a shift register, the order of loading bits must be correct. Data can be clocked in to the Print Head at a maximum rate of 10 MHz.

Once all the bits have been loaded, they must be transferred in parallel to the Print Head output buffer, ready for printing. The transfer is accomplished by a single pulse on the segment's ParallelXferClock pin.

Controlling the Print

In order to conserve power, not all the dots of the Print Head have to be printed simultaneously. A set of control lines enables the printing of specific dots. An external controller, such as the ACP, can change the number of dots printed at once, as well as the duration of the print pulse in accordance with speed and/or power requirements.

Each segment has 5 NozzleSelect lines, which are decoded to select 32 sets of nozzles per row. Since each row has 375 nozzles, each set contains 12 nozzles. There are also 2 BankEnable lines, one for each of the odd and even rows of color. Finally, each segment has 3 ColorEnable lines, one for each of C, M, and Y colors. A pulse on one of the ColorEnable lines causes the specified nozzles of the color's specified rows to be printed. A pulse is typically about 2 s in duration.

If all the segments are controlled by the same set of NozzleSelect, BankEnable and ColorEnable lines (wired externally to the print head), the following is true:

If both odd and even banks print simultaneously (both BankEnable bits are set), 24 nozzles fire simultaneously per segment, 192 nozzles in all, consuming 5.7 Watts.

If odd and even banks print independently, only 12 nozzles fire simultaneously per segment, 96 in all, consuming 2.85 Watts.

Print Head Interface 62

The Print Head Interface 62 connects the ACP to the Print Head, providing both data and appropriate signals to the external Print Head. The Print Head Interface 62 works in conjunction with both a VLIW processor 74 and a software algorithm running on the CPU in order to print a photo in approximately 2 seconds.

An overview of the inputs and outputs to the Print Head Interface is shown in FIG. 119. The Address and Data Buses are used by the CPU to address the various registers in the Print Head Interface. A single BitClock output line connects to all 8 segments on the print head. The 8 DataBits lines lead one to each segment, and are clocked in to the 8 segments on the print head simultaneously (on a BitClock pulse). For example, dot 0 is transferred to segment₀, dot 750 is transferred to segment₁, dot 1500 to segment₂etc. simultaneously.

The VLIW Output FIFO contains the dithered bi-level C, M, and Y 6000×9000 resolution print image in the correct order for output to the 8 DataBits. The ParallelXferClock is connected to each of the 8 segments on the print head, so that on a single pulse, all segments transfer their bits at the same time. Finally, the NozzleSelect, BankEnable and ColorEnable lines are connected to each of the 8 segments, allowing the Print Head Interface to control the duration of the C, M, and Y drop pulses as well as how many drops are printed with each pulse. Registers in the Print Head Interface allow the specification of pulse durations between 0 and 6 μs, with a typical duration of 2 μs.

Printing an Image

There are 2 phases that must occur before an image is in the hand of the Artcam user:

1. Preparation of the image to be printed

2. Printing the prepared image

Preparation of an image only needs to be performed once. Printing the image can be performed as many times as desired.

Prepare the Image

Preparing an image for printing involves:

1. Convert the Photo Image into a Print Image

2. Rotation of the Print Image (internal color space) to align the output for the orientation of the printer

3. Up-interpolation of compressed channels (if necessary)

4. Color conversion from the internal color space to the CMY color space appropriate to the specific printer and ink

At the end of image preparation, a 4.5 MB correctly oriented 1000×1500 CMY image is ready to be printed.

Convert Photo Image to Print Image

The conversion of a Photo Image into a Print Image requires the execution of a Vark script to perform image processing. The script is either a default image enhancement script or a Vark script taken from the currently inserted Artcard. The Vark script is executed via the CPU, accelerated by functions performed by the VLIW Vector Processor.

Rotate the Print Image

The image in memory is originally oriented to be top upwards. This allows for straightforward Vark processing. Before the image is printed, it must be aligned with the print roll's orientation. The re-alignment only needs to be done once. Subsequent Prints of a Print Image will already have been rotated appropriately.

The transformation to be applied is simply the inverse of that applied during capture from the CCD when the user pressed the “Image Capture” button on the Artcam. If the original rotation was 0, then no transformation needs to take place. If the original rotation was +90 degrees, then the rotation before printing needs to be −90 degrees (same as 270 degrees). The method used to apply the rotation is the Vark accelerated Affine Transform function. The Affine Transform engine can be called to rotate each color channel independently. Note that the color channels cannot be rotated in place. Instead, they can make use of the space previously used for the expanded single channel (1.5 MB).

FIG. 120 shows an example of rotation of a Lab image where the a and b channels are compressed 4:1. The L channel is rotated into the space no longer required (the single channel area), then the a channel can be rotated into the space left vacant by L, and finally the b channel can be rotated. The total time to rotate the 3 channels is 0.09 seconds. It is an acceptable period of time to elapse before the first print image. Subsequent prints do not incur this overhead.

Up Interpolate and Color Convert

The Lab image must be converted to CMY before printing. Different processing occurs depending on whether the a and b channels of the Lab image is compressed. If the Lab image is compressed, the a and b channels must be decompressed before the color conversion occurs. If the Lab image is not compressed, the color conversion is the only necessary step. The Lab image must be up interpolated (if the a and b channels are compressed) and converted into a CMY image. A single VLIW process combining scale and color transform can be used.

The method used to perform the color conversion is the Vark accelerated Color Convert function. The Affine Transform engine can be called to rotate each color channel independently. The color channels cannot be rotated in place. Instead, they can make use of the space previously used for the expanded single channel (1.5 MB).

Print the Image

Printing an image is concerned with taking a correctly oriented 1000×1500 CMY image, and generating data and signals to be sent to the external Print Head. The process involves the CPU working in conjunction with a VLIW process and the Print Head Interface.

The resolution of the image in the Artcam is 1000×1500. The printed image has a resolution of 6000×9000 dots, which makes for a very straightforward relationship: 1 pixel=6×6=36 dots. As shown in FIG. 121 since each dot is 16.6 μm, the 6×6 dot square is 100 μm square. Since each of the dots is bi-level, the output must be dithered.

The image should be printed in approximately 2 seconds. For 9000 rows of dots this implies a time of 222 μs time between printing each row. The Print Head Interface must generate the 6000 dots in this time, an average of 37 ns per dot. However, each dot comprises 3 colors, so the Print Head Interface must generate each color component in approximately 12 ns, or 1 clock cycle of the ACP (10 ns at 100 MHz). One VLIW process is responsible for calculating the next line of 6000 dots to be printed. The odd and even C, M, and Y dots are generated by dithering input from 6 different 1000×1500 CMY image lines. The second VLIW process is responsible for taking the previously calculated line of 6000 dots, and correctly generating the 8 bits of data for the 8 segments to be transferred by the Print Head Interface to the Print Head in a single transfer.

A CPU process updates registers in the first VLIW process 3 times per print line (once per color component=27000 times in 2 seconds0, and in the 2nd VLIW process once every print line (9000 times in 2 seconds). The CPU works one line ahead of the VLIW process in order to do this.

Finally, the Print Head Interface takes the 8 bit data from the VLIW Output FIFO, and outputs it unchanged to the Print Head, producing the BitClock signals appropriately. Once all the data has been transferred a ParallelXferClock signal is generated to load the data for the next print line. In conjunction with transferring the data to the Print Head, a separate timer is generating the signals for the different print cycles of the Print Head using the NozzleSelect, ColorEnable, and BankEnable lines a specified by Print Head Interface internal registers.

The CPU also controls the various motors and guillotine via the parallel interface during the print process.

Generate C, M, and Y Dots

The input to this process is a 1000×1500 CMY image correctly oriented for printing. The image is not compressed in any way. As illustrated in FIG. 122, a VLIW microcode program takes the CMY image, and generates the C, M, and Y pixels required by the Print Head Interface to be dithered.

The process is run 3 times, once for each of the 3 color components. The process consists of 2 sub-processes run in parallel—one for producing even dots, and the other for producing odd dots. Each sub-process takes one pixel from the input image, and produces 3 output dots (since one pixel=6 output dots, and each sub-process is concerned with either even or odd dots). Thus one output dot is generated each cycle, but an input pixel is only read once every 3 cycles.

The original dither cell is a 64×64 cell, with each entry 8 bits. This original cell is divided into an odd cell and an even cell, so that each is still 64 high, but only 32 entries wide. The even dither cell contains original dither cell pixels 0, 2, 4 etc., while the odd contains original dither cell pixels 1, 3, 5 etc. Since a dither cell repeats across a line, a single 32 byte line of each of the 2 dither cells is required during an entire line, and can therefore be completely cached. The odd and even lines of a single process line are staggered 8 dot lines apart, so it is convenient to rotate the odd dither cell's lines by 8 lines. Therefore the same offset into both odd and even dither cells can be used. Consequently the even dither cell's line corresponds to the even entries of line L in the original dither cell, and the even dither cell's line corresponds to the odd entries of line L+8 in the original dither cell.

The process is run 3 times, once for each of the color components. The CPU software routine must ensure that the Sequential Read Iterators for odd and even lines are pointing to the correct image lines corresponding to the print heads. For example, to produce one set of 18,000 dots (3 sets of 6000 dots):

- Yellow even dot line=0, therefore input Yellow image line=0/6=0
- Yellow odd dot line=8, therefore input Yellow image line=8/6=1
- Magenta even line=10, therefore input Magenta image line=10/6=1
- Magenta odd line=18, therefore input Magenta image line=18/6=3
- Cyan even line=20, therefore input Cyan image line=20/6=3
- Cyan odd line=28, therefore input Cyan image line=28/6=4
  
  Subsequent sets of input image lines are:
- Y=[0, 1], M=[1, 3], C=[3, 4]
- Y=[0, 1], M=[1, 3], C=[3, 4]
- Y=[0, 1], M=[2, 3], C=[3, 5]
- Y=[0, 1], M=[2, 3], C=[3, 5]
- Y=[0, 2], M=[2, 3], C=[4, 5]

The dither cell data however, does not need to be updated for each color component. The dither cell for the 3 colors becomes the same, but offset by 2 dot lines for each component.

The Dithered Output is written to a Sequential Write Iterator, with odd and even dithered dots written to 2 separate outputs. The same two Write Iterators are used for all 3 color components, so that they are contiguous within the break-up of odd and even dots.

While one set of dots is being generated for a print line, the previously generated set of dots is being merged by a second VLIW process as described in the next section.

Generate Merged 8 bit Dot Output

This process, as illustrated in FIG. 123, takes a single line of dithered dots and generates the 8 bit data stream for output to the Print Head Interface via the VLIW Output FIFO. The process requires the entire line to have been prepared, since it requires semi-random access to most of the dithered line at once. The following constant is set by software:

Constant
Value

K₁
375

The Sequential Read Iterators point to the line of previously generated dots, with the Iterator registers set up to limit access to a single color component. The distance between subsequent pixels is 375, and the distance between one line and the next is given to be 1 byte. Consequently 8 entries are read for each “line”. A single “line” corresponds to the 8 bits to be loaded on the print head. The total number of “lines” in the image is set to be 375. With at least 8 cache lines assigned to the Sequential Read Iterator, complete cache coherence is maintained. Instead of counting the 8 bits, 8 Microcode steps count implicitly.

The generation process first reads all the entries from the even dots, combining 8 entries into a single byte which is then output to the VLIW Output FIFO. Once all 3000 even dots have been read, the 3000 odd dots are read and processed. A software routine must update the address of the dots in the odd and even Sequential Read Iterators once per color component, which equates to 3 times per line. The two VLIW processes require all 8 ALUs and the VLIW Output FIFO. As long as the CPU is able to update the registers as described in the two processes, the VLIW processor can generate the dithered image dots fast enough to keep up with the printer.

Data Card Reader

FIG. 124, there is illustrated on form of card reader 500 which allows for the insertion of Artcards 9 for reading. FIG. 123 shows an exploded perspective of the reader of FIG. 124. Cardreader is interconnected to a computer system and includes a CCD reading mechanism 35. The cardreader includes pinch rollers 506, 507 for pinching an inserted Artcard 9. One of the roller e.g. 506 is driven by an Artcard motor 37 for the advancement of the card 9 between the two rollers 506 and 507 at a uniformed speed. The Artcard 9 is passed over a series of LED lights 512 which are encased within a clear plastic mould 514 having a semi circular cross section. The cross section focuses the light from the LEDs eg 512 onto the surface of the card 9 as it passes by the LEDs 512. From the surface it is reflected to a high resolution linear CCD 34 which is constructed to a resolution of approximately 480 dpi. The surface of the Artcard 9 is encoded to the level of approximately 1600 dpi hence, the linear CCD 34 supersamples the Artcard surface with an approximately three times multiplier. The Artcard 9 is further driven at a speed such that the linear CCD 34 is able to supersample in the direction of Artcard movement at a rate of approximately 4800 readings per inch. The scanned Artcard CCD data is forwarded from the Artcard reader to ACP 31 for processing. A sensor 49, which can comprise a light sensor acts to detect of the presence of the card 13.

The CCD reader includes a bottom substrate 516, a top substrate 514 which comprises a transparent molded plastic. In between the two substrates is inserted the linear CCD array 34 which comprises a thin long linear CCD array constructed by means of semi-conductor manufacturing processes.

Turning to FIG. 125, there is illustrated a side perspective view, partly in section, of an example construction of the CCD reader unit. The series of LEDs eg. 512 are operated to emit light when a card 9 is passing across the surface of the CCD reader 34. The emitted light is transmitted through a portion of the top substrate 523. The substrate includes a portion eg. 529 having a curved circumference so as to focus light emitted from LED 512 to a point eg. 532 on the surface of the card 9. The focused light is reflected from the point 532 towards the CCD array 34. A series of microlenses eg. 534, shown in exaggerated form, are formed on the surface of the top substrate 523. The microlenses 523 act to focus light received across the surface to the focused down to a point 536 which corresponds to point on the surface of the CCD reader 34 for sensing of light falling on the light sensing portion of the CCD array 34.

A number of refinements of the above arrangement are possible. For example, the sensing devices on the linear CCD 34 may be staggered. The corresponding microlenses 34 can also be correspondingly formed as to focus light into a staggered series of spots so as to correspond to the staggered CCD sensors.

To assist reading, the data surface area of the Artcard 9 is modulated with a checkerboard pattern as previously discussed with reference to FIG. 38. Other forms of high frequency modulation may be possible however.

It will be evident that an Artcard printer can be provided as for the printing out of data on storage Artcard. Hence, the Artcard system can be utilized as a general form of information distribution outside of the Artcam device. An Artcard printer can prints out Artcards on high quality print surfaces and multiple Artcards can be printed on same sheets and later separated. On a second surface of the Artcard 9 can be printed information relating to the files etc. stored on the Artcard 9 for subsequent storage.

Hence, the Artcard system allows for a simplified form of storage which is suitable for use in place of other forms of storage such as CD ROMs, magnetic disks etc. The Artcards 9 can also be mass produced and thereby produced in a substantially inexpensive form for redistribution.

Software Modules—Artcam Application 902

The Artcam application implements the high-level functionality of the Artcam device. This normally involves capturing an image, applying an artistic effect to the image, and then printing the image. In a camera-oriented Artcam device, the image is captured via the Camera Manager 903. In a printer-oriented Artcam device, the image is captured via the Network Manager 904, perhaps as the result of the image being “squirted” by another device.

Artistic effects are found within the unified file system managed by the File Manager 905. An artistic effect consist of a script file and a set of resources. The script is interpreted and applied to the image via the Image Processing Manager 906. Scripts are normally shipped on ArtCards known as Artcards. By default the application uses the script contained on the currently mounted Artcard. The image is printed via the Printer Manager 908.

When the Artcam device starts up, the bootstrap process starts the various manager processes before starting the application. This allows the application to immediately request services from the various managers when it starts.

On initialization the application 902 registers itself as the handler for the events listed below. When it receives an event, it performs the action described in the table.

User interface

event
Action

Lock Focus
Perform any automatic pre-capture setup via the Camera

Manager. This includes auto-focussing, auto-adjusting

exposure, and charging the flash. This is normally initiated

by the user pressing the Take button halfway.

Take
Capture an image via the Camera Manager.

Self-Timer
Capture an image in self-timed mode via the Camera

Manager.

Flash Mode
Update the Camera Manager to use the next flash mode.

Update the Status Display to show the new flash mode.

Print
Print the current image via the Printer Manager. Apply an

artistic effect to the image via the Image Processing

Manager if there is a current script. Update the remaining

prints count on the Status Display (see Print Roll Inserted

below).

Hold
Apply an artistic effect to the current image via the Image

Processing Manager if there is a current script, but don't

print the image.

Eject ArtCards
Eject the currently inserted ArtCards via the File Manager.

Print Roll
Calculate the number of prints remaining based on the Print

Inserted
Manager's remaining media length and the Camera

Manager's aspect ratio. Update the remaining prints count

on the Status display.

Print Roll
Update the Status Display to indicate there is no print roll

Removed
present.

Where the camera includes a display, the application also constructs a graphical user interface via the User Interface Manager 910 which allows the user to edit the current date and time, and other editable camera parameters. The application saves all persistent parameters in flash memory.

Real-Time Microkernel 911

The Real-Time Microkernel schedules processes preemptively on the basis of interrupts and process priority. It provides integrated inter-process communication and timer services, as these are closely tied to process scheduling. All other operating system functions are implemented outside the microkernel.

Camera Manager 903

The Camera Manager provides image capture services. It controls the camera hardware embedded in the Artcam. It provides an abstract camera control interface which allows camera parameters to be queried and set, and images captured. This abstract interface decouples the application from details of camera implementation. The Camera Manager utilizes the following input/output parameters and commands:

output parameters
domains

focus range
real, real

zoom range
real, real

aperture range
real, real

shutter speed range
real, real

input parameters
domains

focus
real

zoom
real

aperture
real

shutter speed
real

aspect ratio
classic, HDTV, panoramic

focus control mode
multi-point auto, single-point auto, manual

exposure control mode
auto, aperture priority, shutter priority, manual

flash mode
auto, auto with red-eye removal, fill, off

view scene mode
on, off

commands
return value domains

Lock Focus
none

Self-Timed Capture
Raw Image

Capture Image
Raw Image

The Camera Manager runs as an asynchronous event-driven process. It contains a set of linked state machines, one for each asynchronous operation. These include auto focussing, charging the flash, counting down the self-timer, and capturing the image. On initialization the Camera Manager sets the camera hardware to a known state. This includes setting a normal focal distance and retracting the zoom. The software structure of the Camera Manager is illustrated in FIG. 128. The software components are described in the following subsections:

Lock Focus 913

Lock Focus automatically adjusts focus and exposure for the current scene, and enables the flash if necessary, depending on the focus control mode, exposure control mode and flash mode. Lock Focus is normally initiated in response to the user pressing the Take button halfway. It is part of the normal image capture sequence, but may be separated in time from the actual capture of the image, if the user holds the take button halfway depressed. This allows the user to do spot focusing and spot metering.

Capture Image 914

Capture Image captures an image of the current scene. It lights a red-eye lamp if the flash mode includes red-eye removal, controls the shutter, triggers the flash if enabled, and senses the image through the image sensor. It determines the orientation of the camera, and hence the captured image, so that the image can be properly oriented during later image processing. It also determines the presence of camera motion during image capture, to trigger deblurring during later image processing.

Self-Timed Capture 915

Self-Timed Capture captures an image of the current scene after counting down a 20 s timer. It gives the user feedback during the countdown via the self-timer LED. During the first 15 s it can light the LED. During the last 5 s it flashes the LED.

View Scene 917

View Scene periodically senses the current scene through the image sensor and displays it on the color LCD, giving the user an LCD-based viewfinder.

Auto Focus 918

Auto Focus changes the focal length until selected regions of the image are sufficiently sharp to signify that they are in focus. It assumes the regions are in focus if an image sharpness metric derived from specified regions of the image sensor is above a fixed threshold. It finds the optimal focal length by performing a gradient descent on the derivative of sharpness by focal length, changing direction and stepsize as required. If the focus control mode is multi point auto, then three regions are used, arranged horizontally across the field of view. If the focus control mode is single-point auto, then one region is used, in the center of the field of view. Auto Focus works within the available focal length range as indicated by the focus controller. In fixed-focus devices it is therefore effectively disabled.

Auto Flash 919

Auto Flash determines if scene lighting is dim enough to require the flash. It assumes the lighting is dim enough if the scene lighting is below a fixed threshold. The scene lighting is obtained from the lighting sensor, which derives a lighting metric from a central region of the image sensor. If the flash is required, then it charges the flash.

Auto Exposure 920

The combination of scene lighting, aperture, and shutter speed determine the exposure of the captured image. The desired exposure is a fixed value. If the exposure control mode is auto, Auto Exposure determines a combined aperture and shutter speed which yields the desired exposure for the given scene lighting. If the exposure control mode is aperture priority, Auto Exposure determines a shutter speed which yields the desired exposure for the given scene lighting and current aperture. If the exposure control mode is shutter priority, Auto Exposure determines an aperture which yields the desired exposure for the given scene lighting and current shutter speed. The scene lighting is obtained from the lighting sensor, which derives a lighting metric from a central region of the image sensor.

Auto Exposure works within the available aperture range and shutter speed range as indicated by the aperture controller and shutter speed controller. The shutter speed controller and shutter controller hide the absence of a mechanical shutter in most Artcam devices.

If the flash is enabled, either manually or by Auto Flash, then the effective shutter speed is the duration of the flash, which is typically in the range 1/1000 s to 1/10000 s.

Image Processing Manager 906 (FIG. 127

The Image Processing Manager provides image processing and artistic effects services. It utilises the VLIW Vector Processor embedded in the Artcam to perform high-speed image processing. The Image Processing Manager contains an interpreter for scripts written in the Vark image processing language. An artistic effect therefore consists of a Vark script file and related resources such as fonts, clip images etc. The software structure of the Image Processing Manager is illustrated in more detail in FIG. 129 and include the following modules:

Convert and Enhance Image 921

The Image Processing Manager performs image processing in the device-independent CIE LAB color space, at a resolution which suits the reproduction capabilities of the Artcam printer hardware. The captured image is first enhanced by filtering out noise. It is optionally processed to remove motion-induced blur. The image is then converted from its device-dependent RGB color space to the CIE LAB color space. It is also rotated to undo the effect of any camera rotation at the time of image capture, and scaled to the working image resolution. The image is further enhanced by scaling its dynamic range to the available dynamic range.

Detect Faces 923

Faces are detected in the captured image based on hue and local feature analysis. The list of detected face regions is used by the Vark script for applying face-specific effects such as warping and positioning speech balloons.

Vark Image Processing Language Interpreter 924

Vark consists of a general-purpose programming language with a rich set of image processing extensions. It provides a range of primitive data types (integer, real, boolean, character), a range of aggregate data types for constructing more complex types (array, string, record), a rich set of arithmetic and relational operators, conditional and iterative control flow (if-then-else, while-do), and recursive functions and procedures. It also provides a range of image-processing data types (image, clip image, matte, color, color lookup table, palette, dither matrix, convolution kernel, etc.), graphics data types (font, text, path), a set of image-processing functions (color transformations, compositing, filtering, spatial transformations and warping, illumination, text setting and rendering), and a set of higher-level artistic functions (tiling, painting and stroking).

A Vark program is portable in two senses. Because it is interpreted, it is independent of the CPU and image processing engines of its host. Because it uses a device-independent model space and a device-independent color space, it is independent of the input color characteristics and resolution of the host input device, and the output color characteristics and resolution of the host output device.

The Vark Interpreter 924 parses the source statements which make up the Vark script and produces a parse tree which represents the semantics of the script. Nodes in the parse tree correspond to statements, expressions, sub-expressions, variables and constants in the program. The root node corresponds to the main procedure statement list.

The interpreter executes the program by executing the root statement in the parse tree. Each node of the parse tree asks its children to evaluate or execute themselves appropriately. An if statement node, for example, has three children—a condition expression node, a then statement node, and an else statement node. The if statement asks the condition expression node to evaluate itself, and depending on the boolean value returned asks the then statement or the else statement to execute itself. It knows nothing about the actual condition expression or the actual statements.

While operations on most data types are executed during execution of the parse tree, operations on image data types are deferred until after execution of the parse tree. This allows imaging operations to be optimized so that only those intermediate pixels which contribute to the final image are computed. It also allows the final image to be computed in multiple passes by spatial subdivision, to reduce the amount of memory required.

During execution of the parse tree, each imaging function simply returns an imaging graph—a graph whose nodes are imaging operators and whose leaves are images—constructed with its corresponding imaging operator as the root and its image parameters as the root's children. The image parameters are of course themselves image graphs. Thus each successive imaging function returns a deeper imaging graph.

After execution of the parse tree, an imaging graph is obtained which corresponds to the final image. This imaging graph is then executed in a depth-first manner (like any expression tree), with the following two optimizations: (1) only those pixels which contribute to the final image are computed at a given node, and (2) the children of a node are executed in the order which minimizes the amount of memory required. The imaging operators in the imaging graph are executed in the optimized order to produce the final image. Compute-intensive imaging operators are accelerated using the VLIW Processor embedded in the Artcam device. If the amount of memory required to execute the imaging graph exceeds available memory, then the final image region is subdivided until the required memory no longer exceeds available memory.

For a well-constructed Vark program the first optimization is unlikely to provide much benefit per se. However, if the final image region is subdivided, then the optimization is likely to provide considerable benefit. It is precisely this optimization, then, that allows subdivision to be used as an effective technique for reducing memory requirements. One of the consequences of deferred execution of imaging operations is that program control flow cannot depend on image content, since image content is not known during parse tree execution. In practice this is not a severe restriction, but nonetheless must be borne in mind during language design.

The notion of deferred execution (or lazy evaluation) of imaging operations is described by Guibas and Stolfi (Guibas, L. J., and J. Stolfi, “A Language for Bitmap Manipulation”, ACM Transactions on Graphics, Vol. 1, No. 3, July 1982, pp. 191-214). They likewise construct an imaging graph during the execution of a program, and during subsequent graph evaluation propagate the result region backwards to avoid computing pixels which do not contribute to the final image. Shantzis additionally propagates regions of available pixels forwards during imaging graph evaluation (Shantzis, M. A., “A Model for Efficient and Flexible Image Computing”, Computer Graphics Proceedings, Annual Conference Series, 1994, pp. 147-154). The Vark Interpreter uses the more sophisticated multi-pass bi-directional region propagation scheme described by Cameron (Cameron, S., “Efficient Bounds in Constructive Solid Geometry”, IEEE Computer Graphics & Applications, Vol. 11, No. 3, May 1991, pp. 68-74). The optimization of execution order to minimise memory usage is due to Shantzis, but is based on standard compiler theory (Aho, A. V., R. Sethi, and J. D. Ullman, “Generating Code from DAGs”, in Compilers: Principles, Techniques, and Tools, Addison-Wesley, 1986, pp. 557-567). The Vark Interpreter uses a more sophisticated scheme than Shantzis, however, to support variable-sized image buffers. The subdivision of the result region in conjunction with region propagation to reduce memory usage is also due to Shantzis.

Printer Manager 908 (FIG. 127)

The Printer Manager provides image printing services. It controls the Ink Jet printer hardware embedded in the Artcam. It provides an abstract printer control interface which allows printer parameters to be queried and set, and images printed. This abstract interface decouples the application from details of printer implementation and includes the following variables:

output parameters
domains

media is present
bool

media has fixed page size
bool

media width
real

remaining media length
real

fixed page size
real, real

input parameters
domains

page size
real, real

commands
return value domains

Print Image
none

output events

invalid media

media exhausted

media inserted

media removed

The Printer Manager runs as an asynchronous event-driven process. It contains a set of linked state machines, one for each asynchronous operation. These include printing the image and auto mounting the print roll. The software structure of the Printer Manager is illustrated in FIG. 130. The software components are described in the following description:

Print Image 930

Print Image prints the supplied image. It uses the VLIW Processor to prepare the image for printing. This includes converting the image color space to device-specific CMY and producing half-toned bi-level data in the format expected by the print head.

Between prints, the paper is retracted to the lip of the print roll to allow print roll removal, and the nozzles can be capped to prevent ink leakage and drying. Before actual printing starts, therefore, the nozzles are uncapped and cleared, and the paper is advanced to the print head. Printing itself consists of transferring line data from the VLIW processor, printing the line data, and advancing the paper, until the image is completely printed. After printing is complete, the paper is cut with the guillotine and retracted to the print roll, and the nozzles are capped. The remaining media length is then updated in the print roll.

Auto Mount Print Roll 131

Auto Mount Print Roll responds to the insertion and removal of the print roll. It generates print roll insertion and removal events which are handled by the application and used to update the status display. The print roll is authenticated according to a protocol between the authentication chip embedded in the print roll and the authentication chip embedded in Artcam. If the print roll fails authentication then it is rejected. Various information is extracted from the print roll. Paper and ink characteristics are used during the printing process. The remaining media length and the fixed page size of the media, if any, are published by the Print Manager and are used by the application.

User Interface Manager 910 (FIG. 127)

The User Interface Manager is illustrated in more detail if FIG. 131 and provides user interface management services. It consists of a Physical User Interface Manager 911, which controls status display and input hardware, and a Graphical User Interface Manager 912, which manages a virtual graphical user interface on the color display. The User Interface Manager translates virtual and physical inputs into events. Each event is placed in the event queue of the process registered for that event.

File Manager 905 (FIG. 128)

The File Manager provides file management services. It provides a unified hierarchical file system within which the file systems of all mounted volumes appear. The primary removable storage medium used in the Artcam is the ArtCards. A ArtCards is printed at high resolution with blocks of bi-level dots which directly represents error-tolerant Reed-Solomon-encoded binary data. The block structure supports append and append-rewrite in suitable read-write ArtCards devices (not initially used in Artcam). At a higher level a ArtCards can contain an extended append-rewriteable IS09660 CD-ROM file system. The software structure of the File Manager, and the ArtCards Device Controller in particular, can be as illustrated in FIG. 132.

Network Manager 904 (FIG. 128)

The Network Manager provides “appliance” networking services across various interfaces including infra-red (IrDA) and universal serial bus (USB). This allows the Artcam to share captured images, and receive images for printing.

Clock Manager 907 (FIG. 128)

The Clock Manager provides date and time-of-day clock services. It utilises the battery-backed real-time clock embedded in the Artcam, and controls it to the extent that it automatically adjusts for clock drift, based on auto-calibration carried out when the user sets the time.

Power Management

When the system is idle it enters a quiescent power state during which only periodic scanning for input events occurs. Input events include the press of a button or the insertion of a ArtCards. As soon as an input event is detected the Artcam device re-enters an active power state. The system then handles the input event in the usual way.

Even when the system is in an active power state, the hardware associated with individual modules is typically in a quiescent power state. This reduces overall power consumption, and allows particularly draining hardware components such as the printer's paper cutting guillotine to monopolise the power source when they are operating. A camera-oriented Artcam device is, by default, in image capture mode. This means that the camera is active, and other modules, such as the printer, are quiescent. This means that when non-camera functions are initiated, the application must explicitly suspend the camera module. Other modules naturally suspend themselves when they become idle.

Claims

1. A processor for an imaging device, the processor comprising: an image sensor interface for receiving data from an image sensor;multiple processing units configured to operate in parallel for processing data from the image sensor interface, wherein each of the multiple processing units includes rewritable memory for storing microcode to operatively control the processing unit; andan instruction input interface for receiving encoded data indicative of an image processing instruction executed by the multiple processing units, the instruction input interface being configured to decode the encoded data corresponding to the image processing instruction,wherein the multiple processing units, the instruction input interface, and the image sensor interface are integrated onto a single chip.
2. The processor according to claim 1, further comprising a crossbar switch that interconnects each of the multiple processing units.
3. The processor according to claim 1, further comprising: an input FIFO (first in, first out) configured for receiving data from the image sensor interface and inputting the data to the multiple processing units, andan output FIFO configured for receiving data processed by the multiple processing units to be read by other components of the imaging device.
4. The processor according to claim 3, further comprising: a central processing unit, anda data bus connecting the central processing unit to the input FIFO and the output FIFO, the central processing unit configured to operatively control the multiple processing units.
5. The processor according to claim 1, further comprising a data cache to store data processed by the multiple processing units.
6. The processor according to claim 1, wherein the data from the image sensor interface is input image data, and the multiple processing units perform one or more processing tasks selected from: rotating the input image data;color converting the input image data; anddithering the input image data.
7. The processor according to claim 5, further comprising a display interface connected to the data cache for reading the data processed by the multiple processing units and transmitting the data processed by the multiple processing units to a display included in the imaging device.
8. The processor according to claim 5, wherein each of the multiple processing units includes at least one address generator for the data processed by the multiple processing units sent to the data cache.
9. The processor according to claim 1, further comprising a keyboard interface for receiving user input of instructions for rewriting the microcode stored in the rewritable memory within each of the multiple processing units.
10. The processor according to claim 1, further comprising a USB (universal serial bus) interface, wherein the imaging device has a USB port for communication with an external device, such that the USB interface connects to the for communication with the external device.
11. An electronic device, comprising: an image sensor; anda processor, comprising: an image sensor interface for receiving data from the image sensor,multiple processing units configured to operate in parallel for processing data from the image sensor interface, wherein each of the multiple processing units includes rewritable memory for storing microcode to operatively control the processing unit, andan instruction input interface for receiving encoded data indicative of an image processing instruction executed by the multiple processing units, the instruction input interface being configured to decode the encoded data corresponding to the image processing instruction,wherein the multiple processing units, the instruction input interface, and the image sensor interface are integrated onto a single chip.
12. The electronic device according to claim 11, wherein the processor further comprises a crossbar switch that interconnects each of the multiple processing units.
13. The electronic device according to claim 11, wherein the processor further comprises: an input FIFO (first in, first out) configured for receiving data from the image sensor interface and inputting the data to the multiple processing units; andan output FIFO configured for receiving data processed by the multiple processing units to be read by other components of the electronic device.
14. The electronic device according to claim 13, wherein the processor further comprises: a central processing unit; anda data bus connecting the central processing unit to the input FIFO and the output FIFO, the central processing unit configured to operatively control the multiple processing units.
15. The electronic device according to claim 11, wherein the processor further comprises a data cache to store data processed by the multiple processing units.
16. The electronic device according to claim 15, wherein the processor further comprises a display interface connected to the data cache for reading the data processed by the multiple processing units and transmitting the data processed by the multiple processing units to a display included in the electronic device.
17. The electronic device according to claim 15, wherein each of the multiple processing units includes at least one address generator for the data processed by the multiple processing units sent to the data cache.
18. The electronic device according to claim 11, wherein the data from the image sensor interface is input image data, and the multiple processing units perform one or more processing tasks selected from: rotating the input image data;color converting the input image data; anddithering the input image data.
19. The electronic device according to claim 11, wherein the processor further comprises a keyboard interface for receiving user input of instructions for rewriting the microcode stored in the rewriteable memory within each of the multiple processing units.
20. The electronic device according to claim 11, further comprising a USB (universal serial bus) port for communication between the electronic device and an external device, wherein the processor further comprises a USB interface for communication with the external device via the USB port.

Priority Claims (2)

Number	Date	Country	Kind
PO7991	Jul 1997	AU	national
PO8504	Aug 1997	AU	national

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION

The present application is a Continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 13/104,021 filed May 10, 2011, now abandoned which is a Continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 12/758,730 filed Apr. 12, 2010, issued Jun. 14, 2011 as U.S. Pat. No. 7,961,249, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 11/045,442 filed Jan. 31, 2005, issued Apr. 20, 2010 as U.S. Pat. No. 7,701,506, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 09/112,786 filed on Jul. 10, 1998, issued Apr. 12, 2005 as U.S. Pat. No. 6,879,341. Each of the above identified patents and applications is hereby incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. With respect to the present application, any disclaimer of claim scope made in the parent application or any predecessor or related application is hereby rescinded.

US Referenced Citations (1739)

Number	Name	Date	Kind
1960667	Hutt et al.	May 1934	A
2506035	Parker	May 1950	A
3223409	Erich et al.	Dec 1965	A
3518417	Bertrams	Jun 1970	A
3573437	Scuitto et al.	Apr 1971	A
3663801	Wahli et al.	May 1972	A
3701098	Acker	Oct 1972	A
3731062	Reilly, Jr.	May 1973	A
3735350	Lemelson	May 1973	A
3737629	See	Jun 1973	A
3748939	Feinstein et al.	Jul 1973	A
3760162	Holter	Sep 1973	A
3774014	Berler	Nov 1973	A
3778541	Bowker	Dec 1973	A
3843132	Ferguson	Oct 1974	A
3852572	Nicoud	Dec 1974	A
3857019	Holtey	Dec 1974	A
3866217	Bennett, Jr.	Feb 1975	A
3893173	Taggart et al.	Jul 1975	A
3896691	Granger et al.	Jul 1975	A
3914877	Hines	Oct 1975	A
3916420	Brown et al.	Oct 1975	A
3943563	Lemelson	Mar 1976	A
3946398	Kyser et al.	Mar 1976	A
3956756	Paton	May 1976	A
3967286	Andersson et al.	Jun 1976	A
3970803	Kinzie, Jr. et al.	Jul 1976	A
3971065	Bayer	Jul 1976	A
4000239	Hamana et al.	Dec 1976	A
4034845	Honegger	Jul 1977	A
4045802	Fukazawa et al.	Aug 1977	A
4048617	Neff	Sep 1977	A
4074324	Barrett et al.	Feb 1978	A
4088981	Gott	May 1978	A
4092654	Alasia	May 1978	A
4161749	Erlichman	Jul 1979	A
4172641	Oyamatsu et al.	Oct 1979	A
4173401	Harvey	Nov 1979	A
4177514	Rupp	Dec 1979	A
4181940	Underwood et al.	Jan 1980	A
4200867	Hill	Apr 1980	A
4213694	Kuseski	Jul 1980	A
4224628	Murray	Sep 1980	A
4234214	Lee	Nov 1980	A
4244006	Kitahara et al.	Jan 1981	A
4253476	Sato	Mar 1981	A
4258387	Lemelson et al.	Mar 1981	A
4262284	Stieff et al.	Apr 1981	A
4262301	Erlichman	Apr 1981	A
4270853	Hatada et al.	Jun 1981	A
4275413	Sakamoto et al.	Jun 1981	A
4282535	Kern et al.	Aug 1981	A
4317138	Bryan et al.	Feb 1982	A
4342051	Suzuki et al.	Jul 1982	A
4372694	Bovio et al.	Feb 1983	A
4383458	Kitai et al.	May 1983	A
4384272	Tanaka et al.	May 1983	A
4394730	Suzuki et al.	Jul 1983	A
4402150	Sullivan	Sep 1983	A
4414316	Conley	Nov 1983	A
4429320	Hattori et al.	Jan 1984	A
4429938	Flor	Feb 1984	A
4434503	Tanaka et al.	Feb 1984	A
4436439	Koto	Mar 1984	A
4454517	Kagaya	Jun 1984	A
4455609	Inamura et al.	Jun 1984	A
4463359	Ayata et al.	Jul 1984	A
4463362	Thomas	Jul 1984	A
4472038	Muramatsu et al.	Sep 1984	A
4488563	Morifuji et al.	Dec 1984	A
4494862	Tanaka	Jan 1985	A
4494864	Smith et al.	Jan 1985	A
4500183	Tanikawa	Feb 1985	A
4500919	Schreiber	Feb 1985	A
4511907	Fukuchi	Apr 1985	A
4518235	Reed et al.	May 1985	A
4521014	Sitrick	Jun 1985	A
4523235	Rajchman	Jun 1985	A
4528575	Matsuda et al.	Jul 1985	A
4531740	Green et al.	Jul 1985	A
4534142	Drefahl	Aug 1985	A
4544184	Freund et al.	Oct 1985	A
4546434	Gioello	Oct 1985	A
4550967	Riches et al.	Nov 1985	A
4558326	Kimura et al.	Dec 1985	A
4567529	Yamaguchi et al.	Jan 1986	A
4574351	Dang et al.	Mar 1986	A
4580721	Coffee et al.	Apr 1986	A
4581710	Hasselmeier	Apr 1986	A
4591900	Heeb et al.	May 1986	A
4592938	Benoit	Jun 1986	A
4596039	Mitchell et al.	Jun 1986	A
4632585	Oyamatsu et al.	Dec 1986	A
4639738	Young et al.	Jan 1987	A
4639769	Rubin et al.	Jan 1987	A
4640529	Katz	Feb 1987	A
4641980	Matsumoto et al.	Feb 1987	A
4652935	Endoh et al.	Mar 1987	A
4665556	Fukushima et al.	May 1987	A
4667208	Shiraki et al.	May 1987	A
4672453	Sakamoto	Jun 1987	A
4681430	Goel et al.	Jul 1987	A
4683477	Braun et al.	Jul 1987	A
4688105	Bloch et al.	Aug 1987	A
4689642	Sugitani	Aug 1987	A
4689683	Efron	Aug 1987	A
4692394	Drexler	Sep 1987	A
4703332	Crotti et al.	Oct 1987	A
4706130	Yamakawa	Nov 1987	A
4707713	Ayata et al.	Nov 1987	A
4710873	Breslow et al.	Dec 1987	A
4724307	Dutton et al.	Feb 1988	A
4724395	Freeman	Feb 1988	A
4727245	Dobbins et al.	Feb 1988	A
4728978	Inoue et al.	Mar 1988	A
4734565	Pierce et al.	Mar 1988	A
4734713	Sato et al.	Mar 1988	A
4740269	Berger et al.	Apr 1988	A
4741327	Yabe	May 1988	A
4745544	Renner et al.	May 1988	A
4746920	Nellen et al.	May 1988	A
4754487	Newmuis	Jun 1988	A
4762986	Suda et al.	Aug 1988	A
4763153	Ishimura et al.	Aug 1988	A
4769764	Levanon	Sep 1988	A
4771295	Baker et al.	Sep 1988	A
4771342	Beesley	Sep 1988	A
4783700	Nagane	Nov 1988	A
4783823	Tasaki et al.	Nov 1988	A
4786820	Ogino et al.	Nov 1988	A
4788563	Omo et al.	Nov 1988	A
4791443	Foley et al.	Dec 1988	A
4796038	Allen et al.	Jan 1989	A
4796087	Guichard et al.	Jan 1989	A
4804831	Baba et al.	Feb 1989	A
4809345	Tabata et al.	Feb 1989	A
4819395	Sugita et al.	Apr 1989	A
4821208	Ryan et al.	Apr 1989	A
4829324	Drake et al.	May 1989	A
4833599	Colwell et al.	May 1989	A
4835388	Bruml et al.	May 1989	A
4837628	Sasaki	Jun 1989	A
4841375	Nakajima et al.	Jun 1989	A
4845767	Mori et al.	Jul 1989	A
4845770	Koshida	Jul 1989	A
4853967	Mandeville	Aug 1989	A
4860375	McCubbrey et al.	Aug 1989	A
4861031	Simms	Aug 1989	A
4862208	Yamada et al.	Aug 1989	A
4864494	Kobus, Jr.	Sep 1989	A
4868676	Matsuura et al.	Sep 1989	A
4875048	Shimizu et al.	Oct 1989	A
4875074	Sangyoji et al.	Oct 1989	A
4875173	Nakajima	Oct 1989	A
4882702	Struger et al.	Nov 1989	A
4887161	Nishi et al.	Dec 1989	A
4890832	Komaki	Jan 1990	A
4896029	Chandler et al.	Jan 1990	A
4897719	Griffin	Jan 1990	A
4897724	Veldhuis	Jan 1990	A
4902880	Garczynski et al.	Feb 1990	A
4903132	Yamawaki	Feb 1990	A
4904100	Enix	Feb 1990	A
4905029	Kelley	Feb 1990	A
4914452	Fukawa	Apr 1990	A
4937676	Finelli et al.	Jun 1990	A
4942470	Nishitani et al.	Jul 1990	A
4943820	Larock	Jul 1990	A
4947262	Yajima et al.	Aug 1990	A
4949189	Ohmori	Aug 1990	A
4949391	Faulkerson et al.	Aug 1990	A
4952967	Kazumi et al.	Aug 1990	A
4954910	Ueno	Sep 1990	A
4956656	Yamamoto et al.	Sep 1990	A
4961088	Gilliland et al.	Oct 1990	A
4964066	Yamane et al.	Oct 1990	A
4965596	Nagoshi et al.	Oct 1990	A
RE33425	Nihei	Nov 1990	E
4975969	Tal	Dec 1990	A
4977459	Ebinuma et al.	Dec 1990	A
4979838	Yokota et al.	Dec 1990	A
4980856	Ueno	Dec 1990	A
4983996	Kinoshita	Jan 1991	A
4985848	Pfeiffer et al.	Jan 1991	A
4987030	Saito et al.	Jan 1991	A
4990005	Karakawa	Feb 1991	A
4991205	Lemelson	Feb 1991	A
4993405	Takamura et al.	Feb 1991	A
4999647	Wood et al.	Mar 1991	A
5005998	Takanashi et al.	Apr 1991	A
5006929	Barbero et al.	Apr 1991	A
5009626	Katz	Apr 1991	A
5012349	De Fay	Apr 1991	A
5016037	Taniguchi et al.	May 1991	A
5016112	Nakajima et al.	May 1991	A
5018072	Ibamoto et al.	May 1991	A
5020926	Wilhelm	Jun 1991	A
5021892	Kita et al.	Jun 1991	A
5026042	Miller	Jun 1991	A
5028409	Elberbaum	Jul 1991	A
5028997	Elberbaum	Jul 1991	A
5031049	Toyama et al.	Jul 1991	A
5032922	Stemmle	Jul 1991	A
5035325	Kitsuki	Jul 1991	A
5035929	Myers	Jul 1991	A
5036472	Buckley et al.	Jul 1991	A
5040006	Matsumura et al.	Aug 1991	A
5043561	Kimata	Aug 1991	A
5043748	Katayama et al.	Aug 1991	A
5049898	Arthur et al.	Sep 1991	A
5051838	Cho et al.	Sep 1991	A
5053814	Takano et al.	Oct 1991	A
5055997	Sluijter et al.	Oct 1991	A
5058856	Gordon et al.	Oct 1991	A
5065170	Rezanka et al.	Nov 1991	A
5067713	Soules et al.	Nov 1991	A
5081575	Hiller et al.	Jan 1992	A
5091966	Bloomberg et al.	Feb 1992	A
5097282	Itoh et al.	Mar 1992	A
5097285	Wakabayashi et al.	Mar 1992	A
5101096	Ohyama et al.	Mar 1992	A
5103311	Sluijter et al.	Apr 1992	A
5107100	Shepard et al.	Apr 1992	A
5107276	Kneezel et al.	Apr 1992	A
5107290	Ohsawa	Apr 1992	A
5111288	Blackshear	May 1992	A
5111419	Morley	May 1992	A
5115888	Schneider	May 1992	A
5119115	Buat et al.	Jun 1992	A
5119179	Hagino	Jun 1992	A
5121139	Burke	Jun 1992	A
5121209	Smith et al.	Jun 1992	A
5121349	Naito	Jun 1992	A
5124692	Sasson	Jun 1992	A
5132798	Yoshimura et al.	Jul 1992	A
5134495	Frazier et al.	Jul 1992	A
5135095	Kocznar et al.	Aug 1992	A
5138459	Roberts et al.	Aug 1992	A
D329862	Watanabe et al.	Sep 1992	S
5144340	Hotomi et al.	Sep 1992	A
5144423	Knauer et al.	Sep 1992	A
5146328	Yamasaki et al.	Sep 1992	A
5146592	Pfeiffer et al.	Sep 1992	A
5148288	Hannah	Sep 1992	A
5148534	Comerford	Sep 1992	A
5151726	Iwashita et al.	Sep 1992	A
5153532	Albers et al.	Oct 1992	A
5153738	Stemmle	Oct 1992	A
5154956	Fradrich	Oct 1992	A
5155502	Kimura et al.	Oct 1992	A
5160577	Deshpande	Nov 1992	A
5160943	Pettigre et al.	Nov 1992	A
5160945	Drake	Nov 1992	A
5161037	Saito	Nov 1992	A
5163762	Murakami	Nov 1992	A
5164827	Paff	Nov 1992	A
5164831	Kuchta et al.	Nov 1992	A
5172423	France	Dec 1992	A
5175808	Sayre	Dec 1992	A
5179389	Arai et al.	Jan 1993	A
5179936	O'Hara et al.	Jan 1993	A
5181254	Schweizer et al.	Jan 1993	A
5182548	Haeberli	Jan 1993	A
5184169	Nishitani	Feb 1993	A
5184907	Hamada et al.	Feb 1993	A
5189520	Okayasu et al.	Feb 1993	A
5189529	Ishiwata et al.	Feb 1993	A
5191640	Plass	Mar 1993	A
5191647	Masaki	Mar 1993	A
5200598	Rencontre	Apr 1993	A
5204944	Wolberg et al.	Apr 1993	A
5206919	Keating	Apr 1993	A
5208610	Su et al.	May 1993	A
5212021	Smith et al.	May 1993	A
5216490	Greiff et al.	Jun 1993	A
5220352	Yamamoto et al.	Jun 1993	A
5220400	Anderson et al.	Jun 1993	A
5221833	Hecht	Jun 1993	A
5222229	Fukuda et al.	Jun 1993	A
5224179	Denker et al.	Jun 1993	A
5225294	Schifrin	Jul 1993	A
5226125	Balmer et al.	Jul 1993	A
5230027	Kikuchi	Jul 1993	A
5231455	Day	Jul 1993	A
5235428	Hirota et al.	Aug 1993	A
5235686	Bosshart	Aug 1993	A
5237402	Deshon et al.	Aug 1993	A
5237686	Asano et al.	Aug 1993	A
5239292	Willan	Aug 1993	A
5240238	Lee	Aug 1993	A
5241165	Drexler	Aug 1993	A
5241372	Ohba	Aug 1993	A
5243174	Veeneman et al.	Sep 1993	A
5243370	Slater	Sep 1993	A
5243381	Hube	Sep 1993	A
5245365	Woodard et al.	Sep 1993	A
5247611	Norden-Paul et al.	Sep 1993	A
5260735	Ishikawa et al.	Nov 1993	A
5265033	Vajk et al.	Nov 1993	A
5266781	Warwick et al.	Nov 1993	A
5267021	Ramchandran et al.	Nov 1993	A
5267334	Normille et al.	Nov 1993	A
5270808	Tanioka	Dec 1993	A
5275877	Isayev	Jan 1994	A
5276472	Bell et al.	Jan 1994	A
5276521	Mori	Jan 1994	A
5278608	Taylor et al.	Jan 1994	A
5278657	Tamura	Jan 1994	A
5280160	Yamamoto et al.	Jan 1994	A
5280620	Sluijter et al.	Jan 1994	A
5282044	Misawa et al.	Jan 1994	A
5282051	Walker	Jan 1994	A
5288980	Patel et al.	Feb 1994	A
5288986	Pine et al.	Feb 1994	A
5291227	Suzuki	Mar 1994	A
5291243	Heckman et al.	Mar 1994	A
5294782	Kumar	Mar 1994	A
5297217	Hamilton, Jr. et al.	Mar 1994	A
5297289	Mintzer	Mar 1994	A
5300958	Burke et al.	Apr 1994	A
5300976	Lim et al.	Apr 1994	A
5301043	Ichikawa	Apr 1994	A
5307470	Kataoka et al.	Apr 1994	A
5315316	Khormaee	May 1994	A
5317146	Isobe	May 1994	A
5318370	Nehowig	Jun 1994	A
5319462	Haruki et al.	Jun 1994	A
5322594	Bol	Jun 1994	A
5323203	Maruyama et al.	Jun 1994	A
5325493	Herrell et al.	Jun 1994	A
5327260	Shimomae	Jul 1994	A
5328281	Narita et al.	Jul 1994	A
5334920	Ito et al.	Aug 1994	A
5335170	Petteruti et al.	Aug 1994	A
5336004	Harada et al.	Aug 1994	A
5336874	Hasegawa	Aug 1994	A
5337361	Wang et al.	Aug 1994	A
5339102	Carlotta	Aug 1994	A
5339170	Fan	Aug 1994	A
5339396	Muramatsu et al.	Aug 1994	A
5343031	Yoshida	Aug 1994	A
5343309	Roetling	Aug 1994	A
5343386	Barber	Aug 1994	A
5344248	Schoon et al.	Sep 1994	A
5345288	Kobayashi et al.	Sep 1994	A
5345505	Pires	Sep 1994	A
5347403	Uekusa	Sep 1994	A
5351071	Matsuda et al.	Sep 1994	A
5351095	Kerdranvat	Sep 1994	A
D351144	Fishbine et al.	Oct 1994	S
5356971	Sagawa et al.	Oct 1994	A
5359387	Hicks	Oct 1994	A
5361366	Kawano et al.	Nov 1994	A
5363134	Barbehenn et al.	Nov 1994	A
5363209	Eschbach et al.	Nov 1994	A
5363212	Taniuchi et al.	Nov 1994	A
5365312	Hillmann et al.	Nov 1994	A
5369261	Shamir	Nov 1994	A
5373322	Laroche et al.	Dec 1994	A
5374995	Loveridge et al.	Dec 1994	A
5376561	Vu et al.	Dec 1994	A
5381172	Ujita et al.	Jan 1995	A
5384609	Ogawa et al.	Jan 1995	A
5384899	Amit	Jan 1995	A
5392365	Steinkirchner	Feb 1995	A
5393152	Hattori et al.	Feb 1995	A
5396286	Ishizuka	Mar 1995	A
5398063	Yamana	Mar 1995	A
5398131	Hall et al.	Mar 1995	A
5398315	Johnson et al.	Mar 1995	A
5399850	Nagatani et al.	Mar 1995	A
5402527	Bigby et al.	Mar 1995	A
5404460	Thomsen et al.	Apr 1995	A
5408669	Stewart et al.	Apr 1995	A
5408746	Thoman et al.	Apr 1995	A
5410620	Yoshida	Apr 1995	A
5412197	Smith	May 1995	A
5412402	Searby et al.	May 1995	A
5412410	Rezanka	May 1995	A
5414529	Terada et al.	May 1995	A
5418565	Smith	May 1995	A
5418585	Petruchik	May 1995	A
5419543	Nakamura et al.	May 1995	A
5420409	Longacre et al.	May 1995	A
5420607	Miller et al.	May 1995	A
5420635	Konishi et al.	May 1995	A
5420697	Tuli	May 1995	A
5420940	Sedlar et al.	May 1995	A
5426762	Nakagawa	Jun 1995	A
5428423	Clark	Jun 1995	A
5430518	Tabata et al.	Jul 1995	A
5430525	Ohta et al.	Jul 1995	A
5430861	Finn	Jul 1995	A
5432577	Kobayshi et al.	Jul 1995	A
5432896	Hwong et al.	Jul 1995	A
5432914	Cho	Jul 1995	A
5434618	Hayashi et al.	Jul 1995	A
5434621	Yu	Jul 1995	A
5436657	Fukuoka	Jul 1995	A
5438359	Aoki	Aug 1995	A
5438430	Mackinlay et al.	Aug 1995	A
5438431	Ostromoukhov	Aug 1995	A
5441251	Ohta	Aug 1995	A
5442188	Brimbal et al.	Aug 1995	A
5442387	Loofbourow et al.	Aug 1995	A
5442567	Small	Aug 1995	A
5443320	Agata et al.	Aug 1995	A
5444230	Baldwin et al.	Aug 1995	A
5444468	Fukushima et al.	Aug 1995	A
5444543	Sakano	Aug 1995	A
5448280	Matsuda et al.	Sep 1995	A
5450365	Adachi et al.	Sep 1995	A
5452033	Balling et al.	Sep 1995	A
5456539	Wright et al.	Oct 1995	A
5457515	Quadracci et al.	Oct 1995	A
5457554	Faris	Oct 1995	A
5459819	Watkins et al.	Oct 1995	A
5461440	Toyoda et al.	Oct 1995	A
5462375	Isobe et al.	Oct 1995	A
5463470	Terashita et al.	Oct 1995	A
5465163	Yoshihara et al.	Nov 1995	A
5465213	Ross	Nov 1995	A
5466918	Ray et al.	Nov 1995	A
5467118	Gragg et al.	Nov 1995	A
5469211	Maruichi et al.	Nov 1995	A
5471324	Rolleston	Nov 1995	A
5471592	Gove et al.	Nov 1995	A
5472143	Bartels et al.	Dec 1995	A
5473352	Ishida	Dec 1995	A
5475279	Takeuchi et al.	Dec 1995	A
5475318	Marcus et al.	Dec 1995	A
5477012	Sekendur	Dec 1995	A
5477042	Wang	Dec 1995	A
5477264	Sarbadhikari et al.	Dec 1995	A
5477546	Shibata et al.	Dec 1995	A
5479015	Rudman et al.	Dec 1995	A
5479515	Longacre, Jr.	Dec 1995	A
5482375	Richardson et al.	Jan 1996	A
5482389	Bickoff et al.	Jan 1996	A
5483335	Tobias	Jan 1996	A
5483379	Svanberg et al.	Jan 1996	A
5485504	Ohnsorge	Jan 1996	A
5488223	Austin et al.	Jan 1996	A
5489935	Dornier	Feb 1996	A
5489945	Kannegundla et al.	Feb 1996	A
5489995	Iso et al.	Feb 1996	A
5493332	Dalton et al.	Feb 1996	A
5493335	Parulski et al.	Feb 1996	A
5493409	Maeda et al.	Feb 1996	A
5493684	Gephardt et al.	Feb 1996	A
5495097	Katz et al.	Feb 1996	A
5495568	Beavin	Feb 1996	A
5497498	Taylor	Mar 1996	A
5502485	Suzuki	Mar 1996	A
5502529	Zander	Mar 1996	A
5502577	Mackinlay et al.	Mar 1996	A
5504821	Kanamori et al.	Apr 1996	A
5506603	Kawano et al.	Apr 1996	A
5506620	Ozawa	Apr 1996	A
5510820	Aulick et al.	Apr 1996	A
5510857	Kopet et al.	Apr 1996	A
5512924	Takada et al.	Apr 1996	A
5512951	Torii	Apr 1996	A
5512962	Homma	Apr 1996	A
5513117	Small	Apr 1996	A
5513922	Umbach	May 1996	A
5514860	Berson	May 1996	A
5515101	Yoshida	May 1996	A
5515104	Okada	May 1996	A
5517222	Sugiyama et al.	May 1996	A
5517241	Adachi et al.	May 1996	A
5517265	Zander et al.	May 1996	A
5520470	Willet	May 1996	A
5521372	Hecht et al.	May 1996	A
5521663	Norris, III	May 1996	A
5521710	Strossman	May 1996	A
5523780	Hirosawa et al.	Jun 1996	A
5524194	Chida et al.	Jun 1996	A
5524265	Balmer et al.	Jun 1996	A
5528339	Buhr et al.	Jun 1996	A
5529279	Beatty et al.	Jun 1996	A
5531431	Saito et al.	Jul 1996	A
5533170	Teitzel et al.	Jul 1996	A
5533172	Hurtz et al.	Jul 1996	A
5534864	Ono et al.	Jul 1996	A
5534900	Ohno et al.	Jul 1996	A
5534923	Suda	Jul 1996	A
5534962	Zander	Jul 1996	A
5535371	Stewart et al.	Jul 1996	A
5537075	Miyazaki	Jul 1996	A
5537144	Faris	Jul 1996	A
5537294	Siwinski	Jul 1996	A
5539194	Miller et al.	Jul 1996	A
5539456	Ishii	Jul 1996	A
5541653	Peters et al.	Jul 1996	A
5541654	Roberts	Jul 1996	A
5542487	Schultz et al.	Aug 1996	A
5543941	Parker et al.	Aug 1996	A
5547501	Maruyama et al.	Aug 1996	A
5549740	Takahashi et al.	Aug 1996	A
5550935	Erdem et al.	Aug 1996	A
5550938	Hayakawa et al.	Aug 1996	A
5552837	Mankovitz	Sep 1996	A
5553172	Kimura et al.	Sep 1996	A
5553220	Keene	Sep 1996	A
5553864	Sitrick	Sep 1996	A
5554432	Sandor et al.	Sep 1996	A
5555061	Soshi et al.	Sep 1996	A
5555428	Radigan et al.	Sep 1996	A
5555496	Tackbary et al.	Sep 1996	A
5557310	Kurata et al.	Sep 1996	A
5557324	Wolff	Sep 1996	A
5557332	Koyanagi et al.	Sep 1996	A
5559714	Banks et al.	Sep 1996	A
5559932	Machida et al.	Sep 1996	A
5561604	Buckley et al.	Oct 1996	A
5563643	Carlotta et al.	Oct 1996	A
5563722	Norris	Oct 1996	A
5565900	Cowger et al.	Oct 1996	A
5566290	Silverbrook	Oct 1996	A
5566906	Kamada et al.	Oct 1996	A
5570130	Horii et al.	Oct 1996	A
5570435	Bloomberg et al.	Oct 1996	A
5572310	Hoberock et al.	Nov 1996	A
5572596	Wildes et al.	Nov 1996	A
5572632	Laumeyer et al.	Nov 1996	A
5572635	Takizawa et al.	Nov 1996	A
5574485	Anderson et al.	Nov 1996	A
5576783	Lee	Nov 1996	A
5579116	Sugiyama et al.	Nov 1996	A
5579445	Loce et al.	Nov 1996	A
5581773	Glover	Dec 1996	A
5583971	Lo	Dec 1996	A
5586166	Turban	Dec 1996	A
5586207	Goodwin	Dec 1996	A
5587740	Brennan	Dec 1996	A
5591192	Privitera et al.	Jan 1997	A
5591956	Longacre, Jr. et al.	Jan 1997	A
5592237	Greenway et al.	Jan 1997	A
5592312	Noguchi	Jan 1997	A
5592597	Kiss	Jan 1997	A
5592609	Suzuki et al.	Jan 1997	A
5593236	Bobry	Jan 1997	A
5594500	Tanaka et al.	Jan 1997	A
5598202	Peterson	Jan 1997	A
5598242	Omi et al.	Jan 1997	A
5599231	Hibino et al.	Feb 1997	A
5600402	Kainen	Feb 1997	A
5600563	Cannon et al.	Feb 1997	A
5602377	Beller et al.	Feb 1997	A
5602412	Suzuki et al.	Feb 1997	A
5602574	Williams	Feb 1997	A
5604537	Yamazaki et al.	Feb 1997	A
5606420	Maeda et al.	Feb 1997	A
5608437	Iwata et al.	Mar 1997	A
5610761	Ishibashi et al.	Mar 1997	A
5613146	Gove et al.	Mar 1997	A
5613175	Frankel	Mar 1997	A
5613415	Sanpei	Mar 1997	A
5615123	Davidson et al.	Mar 1997	A
5615384	Allard et al.	Mar 1997	A
5615393	Kikinis et al.	Mar 1997	A
5619030	Shiomi	Apr 1997	A
5619590	Moore, Jr.	Apr 1997	A
5619622	Audi et al.	Apr 1997	A
5619737	Horning et al.	Apr 1997	A
5620269	Gustafson	Apr 1997	A
5621445	Fong et al.	Apr 1997	A
5621524	Mitani	Apr 1997	A
5621545	Motta et al.	Apr 1997	A
5621864	Benabe et al.	Apr 1997	A
5621868	Mizutani et al.	Apr 1997	A
5623581	Attenberg	Apr 1997	A
5624732	Oshima et al.	Apr 1997	A
5625669	McGregor et al.	Apr 1997	A
5625770	Nomura	Apr 1997	A
5633667	Miyazawa	May 1997	A
5633678	Parulski et al.	May 1997	A
5634730	Bobry	Jun 1997	A
5638103	Obata et al.	Jun 1997	A
5640002	Ruppert et al.	Jun 1997	A
5640203	Wakui	Jun 1997	A
5640627	Nakano et al.	Jun 1997	A
5642226	Rosenthal	Jun 1997	A
5644341	Fujii et al.	Jul 1997	A
5644410	Suzuki et al.	Jul 1997	A
5644431	Magee	Jul 1997	A
5644557	Akamine et al.	Jul 1997	A
5644647	Cosgrove et al.	Jul 1997	A
5646658	Thiel et al.	Jul 1997	A
5646752	Kohler et al.	Jul 1997	A
5647484	Fleming	Jul 1997	A
5649031	Nakamure et al.	Jul 1997	A
5652618	Nanba	Jul 1997	A
5652918	Usui	Jul 1997	A
5655164	Tsai	Aug 1997	A
5657237	Mazzoni	Aug 1997	A
5661506	Lazzouni et al.	Aug 1997	A
5663552	Komizo	Sep 1997	A
5664013	Rossi	Sep 1997	A
5665249	Burke et al.	Sep 1997	A
5666141	Matoba et al.	Sep 1997	A
5666226	Ezra et al.	Sep 1997	A
5666411	McCarty	Sep 1997	A
5666516	Combs	Sep 1997	A
5670935	Schofield et al.	Sep 1997	A
5673073	Childers et al.	Sep 1997	A
5677715	Beck	Oct 1997	A
5677716	Cleveland	Oct 1997	A
5678001	Nagel et al.	Oct 1997	A
5678081	Tanaka	Oct 1997	A
5679456	Sakai et al.	Oct 1997	A
5679943	Schultz et al.	Oct 1997	A
5680533	Yamato et al.	Oct 1997	A
5682191	Barrett et al.	Oct 1997	A
5687304	Kiss	Nov 1997	A
5688056	Peyret	Nov 1997	A
5689740	Uchiyama	Nov 1997	A
5691768	Civanlar et al.	Nov 1997	A
5692225	Bernardi et al.	Nov 1997	A
5696892	Redmann et al.	Dec 1997	A
5696913	Gove et al.	Dec 1997	A
5697006	Taguchi et al.	Dec 1997	A
5699102	Ng et al.	Dec 1997	A
5699491	Barzel	Dec 1997	A
5703961	Rogina et al.	Dec 1997	A
5706049	Moghadam et al.	Jan 1998	A
5706870	Maerzke	Jan 1998	A
5708518	Parker et al.	Jan 1998	A
5708900	Yokoyama et al.	Jan 1998	A
5709253	Maerzke	Jan 1998	A
5710582	Hawkins et al.	Jan 1998	A
5710948	Takagi	Jan 1998	A
5713678	Smith et al.	Feb 1998	A
5715228	Takiguchi	Feb 1998	A
5715234	Stephenson et al.	Feb 1998	A
5715325	Bang et al.	Feb 1998	A
5715493	Stephenson	Feb 1998	A
5717197	Petrie	Feb 1998	A
5717776	Watanabe	Feb 1998	A
5719602	Hackleman et al.	Feb 1998	A
5719621	Tsunefuji	Feb 1998	A
5719936	Hillenmayer	Feb 1998	A
5719970	Aoki et al.	Feb 1998	A
5722055	Kobayashi et al.	Feb 1998	A
5722893	Hill et al.	Mar 1998	A
5726219	Shama et al.	Mar 1998	A
5726435	Hara et al.	Mar 1998	A
5726693	Sharma et al.	Mar 1998	A
5726772	Parker et al.	Mar 1998	A
5729252	Fraser	Mar 1998	A
5729471	Jain et al.	Mar 1998	A
5731062	Kim et al.	Mar 1998	A
5731829	Saito et al.	Mar 1998	A
5734154	Jachimowicz et al.	Mar 1998	A
5734414	Nishimura et al.	Mar 1998	A
5734425	Takizawa et al.	Mar 1998	A
5737729	Denman	Apr 1998	A
5740480	Kuhn et al.	Apr 1998	A
5741155	Herman	Apr 1998	A
5742296	Yamada et al.	Apr 1998	A
5742305	Hackleman	Apr 1998	A
5742333	Faris	Apr 1998	A
5742861	Stephenson	Apr 1998	A
5743746	Ho et al.	Apr 1998	A
5745175	Anderson	Apr 1998	A
5748202	Nakatsuka et al.	May 1998	A
5748228	Kobayashi et al.	May 1998	A
5748326	Thompson-Bell et al.	May 1998	A
5748448	Hokari	May 1998	A
5748764	Benati et al.	May 1998	A
5748856	Cariffe et al.	May 1998	A
5749551	Torres et al.	May 1998	A
5750974	Sasaki et al.	May 1998	A
5751303	Erickson et al.	May 1998	A
5751318	Granzow	May 1998	A
5751590	Cannon et al.	May 1998	A
5752114	Saito et al.	May 1998	A
5753344	Jacobsen	May 1998	A
5754227	Fukuoka	May 1998	A
5754677	Kawada	May 1998	A
5754682	Katoh	May 1998	A
5754690	Jackson et al.	May 1998	A
5754700	Kuzma	May 1998	A
5755519	Klinefelter	May 1998	A
5756978	Soltesz et al.	May 1998	A
5757354	Kawamura	May 1998	A
5757388	Stephenson	May 1998	A
5757393	Suzuki	May 1998	A
5816718	Stephenson	May 1998	A
5760814	Kang	Jun 1998	A
5761200	Hsieh	Jun 1998	A
5761219	Maltsev	Jun 1998	A
5761698	Combs	Jun 1998	A
5761726	Guttag et al.	Jun 1998	A
5764248	Scarpetti	Jun 1998	A
5764816	Kohno et al.	Jun 1998	A
5765197	Combs	Jun 1998	A
5767945	Fields et al.	Jun 1998	A
5768382	Schneier et al.	Jun 1998	A
5768482	Winter et al.	Jun 1998	A
5768609	Gove et al.	Jun 1998	A
5771012	Shu et al.	Jun 1998	A
5771245	Zhang	Jun 1998	A
5774760	Nagashima	Jun 1998	A
5777626	Takashima et al.	Jul 1998	A
5781202	Silverbrook	Jul 1998	A
5781708	Austin et al.	Jul 1998	A
5781924	Zaitzeva et al.	Jul 1998	A
5784076	Crump et al.	Jul 1998	A
5784088	Ujita et al.	Jul 1998	A
5784434	Shieh	Jul 1998	A
5784521	Nakatani et al.	Jul 1998	A
5784959	Larios	Jul 1998	A
5787193	Balasubramanian	Jul 1998	A
5788387	Takayama et al.	Aug 1998	A
5788388	Cowger et al.	Aug 1998	A
5790158	Shinada et al.	Aug 1998	A
5790193	Ohmori	Aug 1998	A
5790699	Jackson et al.	Aug 1998	A
5792249	Shirota et al.	Aug 1998	A
5793423	Hamasaki	Aug 1998	A
5793885	Kasson	Aug 1998	A
5793900	Nourbakhsh	Aug 1998	A
5796288	Krech et al.	Aug 1998	A
5796429	Suzuki et al.	Aug 1998	A
5796928	Toyomura et al.	Aug 1998	A
5801657	Fowler et al.	Sep 1998	A
5801736	Ikkatai et al.	Sep 1998	A
5801854	Naylor, Jr.	Sep 1998	A
5802413	Stephenson	Sep 1998	A
5805213	Spaulding et al.	Sep 1998	A
5805296	Hattori	Sep 1998	A
5805550	Ohmori	Sep 1998	A
5805883	Saitoh	Sep 1998	A
5805936	Matsuzaki et al.	Sep 1998	A
5806997	Kawanabe	Sep 1998	A
5808631	Silverbrook	Sep 1998	A
5808672	Wakabayashi et al.	Sep 1998	A
5809181	Metcalfe	Sep 1998	A
5809288	Balmer	Sep 1998	A
5809292	Wilkinson et al.	Sep 1998	A
5809331	Staats et al.	Sep 1998	A
5812071	Kairouz	Sep 1998	A
5812156	Bullock et al.	Sep 1998	A
5814809	Han	Sep 1998	A
5815186	Lewis et al.	Sep 1998	A
5815211	Umei	Sep 1998	A
5816918	Kelly et al.	Oct 1998	A
5818023	Meyerson et al.	Oct 1998	A
5818032	Sun et al.	Oct 1998	A
5819240	Kara	Oct 1998	A
5819662	Koyabu	Oct 1998	A
5821886	Son	Oct 1998	A
5822465	Normile et al.	Oct 1998	A
5822606	Morton	Oct 1998	A
5822608	Dieffenderfer et al.	Oct 1998	A
5822623	Urata et al.	Oct 1998	A
5824410	Sakai et al.	Oct 1998	A
5825006	Longacre et al.	Oct 1998	A
5825383	Abe et al.	Oct 1998	A
5825882	Kowalski et al.	Oct 1998	A
5825947	Sasaki et al.	Oct 1998	A
5826263	Nakabayashi et al.	Oct 1998	A
5826333	Iketani et al.	Oct 1998	A
5828578	Blomgren	Oct 1998	A
5828911	Miyazawa	Oct 1998	A
5829745	Houle	Nov 1998	A
5831644	Kato	Nov 1998	A
5835136	Watanabe et al.	Nov 1998	A
5835616	Lobo et al.	Nov 1998	A
5835641	Sotoda et al.	Nov 1998	A
5835817	Bullock et al.	Nov 1998	A
5838331	DeBry	Nov 1998	A
5838458	Tsai	Nov 1998	A
5841126	Fossum et al.	Nov 1998	A
5841441	Smith	Nov 1998	A
5841513	Yoshimura et al.	Nov 1998	A
5841885	Neff et al.	Nov 1998	A
5845166	Fellegara et al.	Dec 1998	A
5847698	Reavey et al.	Dec 1998	A
5847836	Suzuki	Dec 1998	A
5848255	Kondo	Dec 1998	A
5848264	Baird et al.	Dec 1998	A
5848307	Uchiyama et al.	Dec 1998	A
5848420	Xu	Dec 1998	A
5850234	Kneezel et al.	Dec 1998	A
5852502	Beckett	Dec 1998	A
5852673	Young et al.	Dec 1998	A
5854648	Hanabusa	Dec 1998	A
5854882	Wang	Dec 1998	A
5956051	Suzuki	Dec 1998	A
5859657	Donahue et al.	Jan 1999	A
5859921	Suzuki	Jan 1999	A
5860036	Stephenson	Jan 1999	A
5860363	Childers et al.	Jan 1999	A
5861897	Ide et al.	Jan 1999	A
5864309	Hung	Jan 1999	A
5864630	Cosatto et al.	Jan 1999	A
5866253	Philipps et al.	Feb 1999	A
5866895	Fukuda et al.	Feb 1999	A
5867213	Ouchi	Feb 1999	A
5867394	LaDue et al.	Feb 1999	A
5867704	Tanaka et al.	Feb 1999	A
5869595	Fuller et al.	Feb 1999	A
5870102	Tarolli et al.	Feb 1999	A
5872594	Thompson	Feb 1999	A
5874718	Matsui	Feb 1999	A
5874836	Nowak et al.	Feb 1999	A
5875034	Shintani et al.	Feb 1999	A
5877715	Gowda et al.	Mar 1999	A
5878292	Bell et al.	Mar 1999	A
5881211	Matsumura	Mar 1999	A
5882128	Hinojosa	Mar 1999	A
5883653	Sasaki	Mar 1999	A
5883663	Siwko	Mar 1999	A
5883830	Hirt et al.	Mar 1999	A
5884013	Bosschaerts et al.	Mar 1999	A
5884118	Mestha et al.	Mar 1999	A
5886371	Shinagawa	Mar 1999	A
5886659	Pain et al.	Mar 1999	A
5887992	Yamanashi	Mar 1999	A
5889597	Ara et al.	Mar 1999	A
5892540	Kozlowski et al.	Apr 1999	A
5893037	Reele et al.	Apr 1999	A
5893132	Huffman et al.	Apr 1999	A
5893662	Ito	Apr 1999	A
5894309	Freeman et al.	Apr 1999	A
5894326	McIntyre et al.	Apr 1999	A
5896122	MacDonald et al.	Apr 1999	A
5896155	Lebens et al.	Apr 1999	A
5896169	Boelart	Apr 1999	A
5896176	Das et al.	Apr 1999	A
5896403	Nagasaki et al.	Apr 1999	A
5900909	Parulski et al.	May 1999	A
5901242	Crane et al.	May 1999	A
5903706	Wakabayashi et al.	May 1999	A
5905529	Inuiya et al.	May 1999	A
5907149	Marckini	May 1999	A
5907354	Cama et al.	May 1999	A
5907415	Yabe	May 1999	A
5907434	Sekine et al.	May 1999	A
5909227	Silverbrook	Jun 1999	A
5909248	Stephenson	Jun 1999	A
5909562	Faget et al.	Jun 1999	A
5911056	Faget et al.	Jun 1999	A
5913542	Belucci et al.	Jun 1999	A
5914737	Silverbrook	Jun 1999	A
5914748	Parulski et al.	Jun 1999	A
5914801	Dhuler et al.	Jun 1999	A
5914996	Huang	Jun 1999	A
5915027	Cox et al.	Jun 1999	A
5916358	Bagchi et al.	Jun 1999	A
5917542	Moghadam et al.	Jun 1999	A
5917545	Kowno et al.	Jun 1999	A
5917937	Szeliski et al.	Jun 1999	A
5917963	Miyake	Jun 1999	A
5920062	Williams	Jul 1999	A
5920923	Jillette	Jul 1999	A
5921686	Baird et al.	Jul 1999	A
5923406	Brasington et al.	Jul 1999	A
5923882	Ho et al.	Jul 1999	A
5924737	Schrupp	Jul 1999	A
5929946	Sharp et al.	Jul 1999	A
5930528	Ito et al.	Jul 1999	A
5931467	Kamille	Aug 1999	A
5933137	Anderson	Aug 1999	A
5933179	Fogle et al.	Aug 1999	A
5937063	Davis	Aug 1999	A
5937089	Kobayashi	Aug 1999	A
5937202	Crosetto	Aug 1999	A
5938742	Faddell et al.	Aug 1999	A
5938766	Anderson et al.	Aug 1999	A
5939742	Yiannoulos	Aug 1999	A
5940095	Parish et al.	Aug 1999	A
5946007	Otsuka et al.	Aug 1999	A
5946473	Lotspiech et al.	Aug 1999	A
5949426	Rich	Sep 1999	A
5949439	Ben-Yoseph et al.	Sep 1999	A
5949458	Studholme	Sep 1999	A
5949459	Gasvoda et al.	Sep 1999	A
5949467	Gunther et al.	Sep 1999	A
5949967	Spaulding et al.	Sep 1999	A
5955817	Dhuler et al.	Sep 1999	A
5956163	Clarke et al.	Sep 1999	A
5959943	Yonezawa	Sep 1999	A
5960412	Tackbary et al.	Sep 1999	A
RE36338	Fukuoka	Oct 1999	E
5963104	Buer	Oct 1999	A
5964156	Smith et al.	Oct 1999	A
5965871	Zhou et al.	Oct 1999	A
5966134	Arias	Oct 1999	A
5966553	Nishitani et al.	Oct 1999	A
5969322	Mori et al.	Oct 1999	A
5971533	Kinoshita et al.	Oct 1999	A
5971641	Looney	Oct 1999	A
5973664	Badger	Oct 1999	A
5973733	Gove	Oct 1999	A
5973751	Ishida et al.	Oct 1999	A
5974168	Rushmeier et al.	Oct 1999	A
5974190	Maeda et al.	Oct 1999	A
5974234	Levine et al.	Oct 1999	A
5974238	Chase, Jr.	Oct 1999	A
5977982	Lauzon	Nov 1999	A
5978100	Kinjo	Nov 1999	A
5978511	Horiuchi et al.	Nov 1999	A
5978609	Aoki	Nov 1999	A
5978838	Mohamed et al.	Nov 1999	A
5980010	Stephenson	Nov 1999	A
5982378	Kato	Nov 1999	A
5982424	Simerly et al.	Nov 1999	A
5982853	Liebermann	Nov 1999	A
5984193	Uhling	Nov 1999	A
5986634	Alioshin et al.	Nov 1999	A
5986671	Fredlund et al.	Nov 1999	A
5986698	Nobuoka	Nov 1999	A
5986706	Hirasawa	Nov 1999	A
5986718	Barwacz et al.	Nov 1999	A
5988900	Bobry	Nov 1999	A
5989678	Jacobson	Nov 1999	A
5990469	Bechtel et al.	Nov 1999	A
5990948	Sugiki	Nov 1999	A
5990973	Sakamoto	Nov 1999	A
5991429	Coffin et al.	Nov 1999	A
5991865	Longhenry et al.	Nov 1999	A
5992994	Rasmussen et al.	Nov 1999	A
5995193	Stephany et al.	Nov 1999	A
5995772	Barry et al.	Nov 1999	A
5996893	Soscia	Dec 1999	A
5997124	Capps et al.	Dec 1999	A
5999190	Sheasby et al.	Dec 1999	A
5999203	Cane et al.	Dec 1999	A
5999697	Murase et al.	Dec 1999	A
6000614	Yang et al.	Dec 1999	A
6000621	Hecht et al.	Dec 1999	A
6000773	Murray et al.	Dec 1999	A
6000791	Scheffelin et al.	Dec 1999	A
6005582	Gabriel et al.	Dec 1999	A
6005613	Endsley et al.	Dec 1999	A
6006020	Cutter	Dec 1999	A
6006039	Steinberg et al.	Dec 1999	A
6007195	Kokubo	Dec 1999	A
6009188	Cohen et al.	Dec 1999	A
6010065	Ramachandran et al.	Jan 2000	A
6011536	Hertzmann et al.	Jan 2000	A
6011585	Anderson	Jan 2000	A
6011923	Solomon et al.	Jan 2000	A
6011937	Chaussade et al.	Jan 2000	A
6014165	McIntyre et al.	Jan 2000	A
6014170	Pont et al.	Jan 2000	A
6014457	Kubo et al.	Jan 2000	A
6015211	Kinoshita et al.	Jan 2000	A
6016184	Haneda	Jan 2000	A
RE36589	Akamine et al.	Feb 2000	E
6019449	Bullock et al.	Feb 2000	A
6019461	Yoshimura et al.	Feb 2000	A
6019466	Hermanson	Feb 2000	A
6020898	Saito et al.	Feb 2000	A
6020920	Anderson	Feb 2000	A
6020931	Bilbrey et al.	Feb 2000	A
6022099	Chwalek et al.	Feb 2000	A
6022274	Takeda et al.	Feb 2000	A
6023524	Yamaguchi	Feb 2000	A
6023757	Nishimoto et al.	Feb 2000	A
6028611	Anderson et al.	Feb 2000	A
6032861	Lemelson et al.	Mar 2000	A
6033137	Ito	Mar 2000	A
6034740	Mitsui et al.	Mar 2000	A
6035214	Henderson	Mar 2000	A
6037915	Matsueda et al.	Mar 2000	A
6038491	McGarry et al.	Mar 2000	A
6039430	Helterline et al.	Mar 2000	A
6040849	McIntyre et al.	Mar 2000	A
6042213	Hayasaki et al.	Mar 2000	A
6043821	Sprague et al.	Mar 2000	A
6044428	Rayabhari	Mar 2000	A
6046768	Kaneda et al.	Apr 2000	A
6047130	Oles	Apr 2000	A
6048269	Burns et al.	Apr 2000	A
6049450	Cho et al.	Apr 2000	A
6050669	Yano et al.	Apr 2000	A
6052648	Burfeind et al.	Apr 2000	A
6053407	Wang et al.	Apr 2000	A
6056286	Koga	May 2000	A
6057850	Kichury	May 2000	A
6058498	Nagasaki et al.	May 2000	A
6061179	Inoguchi et al.	May 2000	A
6062667	Matsui et al.	May 2000	A
6062681	Field et al.	May 2000	A
6064492	Eldridge et al.	May 2000	A
6067088	Tanioka et al.	May 2000	A
6069642	Isobe	May 2000	A
6069711	Iwata	May 2000	A
6070013	Cosgrove et al.	May 2000	A
6072586	Bhargava et al.	Jun 2000	A
6073034	Jacobsen	Jun 2000	A
6074042	Gasvoda et al.	Jun 2000	A
6074111	Kasahara	Jun 2000	A
6075882	Mullins et al.	Jun 2000	A
6076913	Garcia et al.	Jun 2000	A
6078307	Daly	Jun 2000	A
6078758	Patton et al.	Jun 2000	A
6081284	Tosaka et al.	Jun 2000	A
6081422	Ganthier et al.	Jun 2000	A
6082581	Anderson et al.	Jul 2000	A
6084713	Rosenthal	Jul 2000	A
6085037	Zawodny et al.	Jul 2000	A
6087638	Silverbrook	Jul 2000	A
6088025	Akamine et al.	Jul 2000	A
6088530	Rydelek et al.	Jul 2000	A
6091514	Hasegawa et al.	Jul 2000	A
6091909	McIntyre et al.	Jul 2000	A
6094221	Anderson	Jul 2000	A
6094223	Kobayashi	Jul 2000	A
6094279	Soscia	Jul 2000	A
6094280	Hayasaki et al.	Jul 2000	A
6094282	Hoda et al.	Jul 2000	A
6095418	Swartz et al.	Aug 2000	A
6095566	Yamamoto et al.	Aug 2000	A
6095633	Harshbarger et al.	Aug 2000	A
6097431	Anderson et al.	Aug 2000	A
6102289	Gabrielson	Aug 2000	A
6102505	McIntyre et al.	Aug 2000	A
6104430	Fukuoka	Aug 2000	A
6106147	Silverbrook	Aug 2000	A
6107988	Phillipps	Aug 2000	A
6111598	Faris	Aug 2000	A
6111605	Suzuki	Aug 2000	A
6115131	Payne	Sep 2000	A
6115137	Ozawa et al.	Sep 2000	A
6115837	Nguyen et al.	Sep 2000	A
6116510	Nishino	Sep 2000	A
6116715	Lefebvre et al.	Sep 2000	A
6118484	Yokota et al.	Sep 2000	A
6118485	Hinoue et al.	Sep 2000	A
6118554	Horaguchi	Sep 2000	A
6119931	Novogrod	Sep 2000	A
6119944	Mulla et al.	Sep 2000	A
6120379	Tanaka et al.	Sep 2000	A
6121990	Fujiwara	Sep 2000	A
6122403	Rhoads	Sep 2000	A
6122526	Parulski et al.	Sep 2000	A
6123263	Feng	Sep 2000	A
6124892	Nakano	Sep 2000	A
6126268	Askeland et al.	Oct 2000	A
6128035	Kai et al.	Oct 2000	A
6128446	Schrock et al.	Oct 2000	A
6131807	Fukuda et al.	Oct 2000	A
6133951	Miyadera	Oct 2000	A
6133954	Jie et al.	Oct 2000	A
6134030	Kaneko et al.	Oct 2000	A
6134339	Luo	Oct 2000	A
6134353	Makram-Ebeid	Oct 2000	A
6135586	McClelland et al.	Oct 2000	A
6136212	Mastrangelo et al.	Oct 2000	A
6137495	Gondek	Oct 2000	A
6137509	Hayasaki	Oct 2000	A
6137521	Matsui	Oct 2000	A
6137525	Lee et al.	Oct 2000	A
6141036	Katayama et al.	Oct 2000	A
6141431	Munetsugu et al.	Oct 2000	A
6144414	Toba	Nov 2000	A
6145025	Lim	Nov 2000	A
6147682	Kim	Nov 2000	A
6147704	Ito et al.	Nov 2000	A
6149256	McIntyre et al.	Nov 2000	A
6151049	Karita et al.	Nov 2000	A
6151073	Steinberg et al.	Nov 2000	A
6152374	Moriyama et al.	Nov 2000	A
6152619	Silverbrook	Nov 2000	A
6154254	Hawkins et al.	Nov 2000	A
6157394	Anderson et al.	Dec 2000	A
6158907	Silverbrook et al.	Dec 2000	A
6160633	Mori	Dec 2000	A
6160642	Mui et al.	Dec 2000	A
6161203	Zuranski et al.	Dec 2000	A
6161915	Bolash et al.	Dec 2000	A
6163338	Johnson et al.	Dec 2000	A
6163340	Yasuda	Dec 2000	A
6163361	McIntyre et al.	Dec 2000	A
6166826	Yokoyama	Dec 2000	A
6166832	Fujimoto	Dec 2000	A
6167551	Nguyen et al.	Dec 2000	A
6167806	Chretinat et al.	Jan 2001	B1
6169854	Hasegawa et al.	Jan 2001	B1
6170943	Wen et al.	Jan 2001	B1
6172688	Iwasaki	Jan 2001	B1
6172706	Tatsumi	Jan 2001	B1
6177683	Kolesar et al.	Jan 2001	B1
6178271	Maas, III	Jan 2001	B1
6178883	Satoh et al.	Jan 2001	B1
6180312	Edwards	Jan 2001	B1
6181361	Bluteau et al.	Jan 2001	B1
6181377	Kobayashi	Jan 2001	B1
6181379	Kingetsu et al.	Jan 2001	B1
6182901	Hecht et al.	Feb 2001	B1
6188430	Motai	Feb 2001	B1
6188431	Oie	Feb 2001	B1
6191406	Nelson et al.	Feb 2001	B1
6195513	Nihei et al.	Feb 2001	B1
6196541	Silverbrook	Mar 2001	B1
6196739	Silverbrook	Mar 2001	B1
6198489	Salesin et al.	Mar 2001	B1
6199874	Galvin et al.	Mar 2001	B1
6199969	Haflinger et al.	Mar 2001	B1
6200216	Peppel	Mar 2001	B1
6201571	Ota	Mar 2001	B1
6203147	Battey et al.	Mar 2001	B1
6204877	Kiyokawa	Mar 2001	B1
6205245	Yuan et al.	Mar 2001	B1
6211909	Maeshima	Apr 2001	B1
6211911	Komiya et al.	Apr 2001	B1
6213588	Silverbrook	Apr 2001	B1
6215561	Kakutani	Apr 2001	B1
6217165	Silverbrook	Apr 2001	B1
6219227	Trane	Apr 2001	B1
6219229	Lee	Apr 2001	B1
6222452	Ahlstrom et al.	Apr 2001	B1
6222637	Ito et al.	Apr 2001	B1
6226015	Danneels	May 2001	B1
6227643	Purcell et al.	May 2001	B1
6229565	Bobry	May 2001	B1
6229621	Kulakowski et al.	May 2001	B1
6231148	Silverbrook	May 2001	B1
6232996	Takahashi et al.	May 2001	B1
6233014	Ochi et al.	May 2001	B1
6234389	Valliani et al.	May 2001	B1
6234392	Murakami	May 2001	B1
6234608	Genovese et al.	May 2001	B1
6236431	Hirasawa et al.	May 2001	B1
6236433	Acharya et al.	May 2001	B1
6238033	Silverbrook	May 2001	B1
6238043	Silverbrook	May 2001	B1
6238044	Silverbrook	May 2001	B1
6238111	Silverbrook	May 2001	B1
6241350	Otsuka et al.	Jun 2001	B1
6241530	Eddy et al.	Jun 2001	B1
6243131	Martin	Jun 2001	B1
6246827	Strolle et al.	Jun 2001	B1
6252971	Wang	Jun 2001	B1
6252976	Schildkraut et al.	Jun 2001	B1
6254477	Sasaki et al.	Jul 2001	B1
6256666	Singhal	Jul 2001	B1
6259469	Ejima et al.	Jul 2001	B1
6260137	Fleck et al.	Jul 2001	B1
6262769	Anderson et al.	Jul 2001	B1
6267520	Unno et al.	Jul 2001	B1
6268882	Elberbaum	Jul 2001	B1
6269217	Rodriguez	Jul 2001	B1
6270177	King et al.	Aug 2001	B1
6270271	Fujiwara	Aug 2001	B1
6273340	Rivailler	Aug 2001	B1
6273535	Inoue et al.	Aug 2001	B1
6275239	Ezer et al.	Aug 2001	B1
6276850	Silverbrook et al.	Aug 2001	B1
6278481	Schmidt	Aug 2001	B1
6278486	Hieda et al.	Aug 2001	B1
6278491	Wang et al.	Aug 2001	B1
6280106	Juan et al.	Aug 2001	B1
6282082	Armitage et al.	Aug 2001	B1
6285410	Marai	Sep 2001	B1
6290334	Ishinaga et al.	Sep 2001	B1
6290349	Silverbrook et al.	Sep 2001	B1
6292272	Okauchi et al.	Sep 2001	B1
6292574	Schildkraut et al.	Sep 2001	B1
6293469	Masson et al.	Sep 2001	B1
6293658	Silverbrook	Sep 2001	B1
6294101	Silverbrook	Sep 2001	B1
6297872	Imamura et al.	Oct 2001	B1
6300976	Fukuoka	Oct 2001	B1
6302329	Iwai et al.	Oct 2001	B1
6304291	Silverbrook	Oct 2001	B1
6304345	Patton et al.	Oct 2001	B1
6304684	Niczyporuk et al.	Oct 2001	B1
6304825	Nowak et al.	Oct 2001	B1
6305775	Ohtsuka et al.	Oct 2001	B1
6312070	Silverbrook	Nov 2001	B1
6312114	Silverbrook	Nov 2001	B1
6315200	Silverbrook	Nov 2001	B1
6315384	Kamaswami et al.	Nov 2001	B1
6317156	Nagasaki et al.	Nov 2001	B1
6317192	Silverbrook et al.	Nov 2001	B1
6318826	Frager et al.	Nov 2001	B1
6320591	Griencewic	Nov 2001	B1
6320617	Gee et al.	Nov 2001	B1
6322181	Silverbrook	Nov 2001	B1
6323912	McIntyre	Nov 2001	B1
6325380	Feigl et al.	Dec 2001	B1
6325488	Beerling et al.	Dec 2001	B1
6328395	Kitahara et al.	Dec 2001	B1
6331867	Eberhard et al.	Dec 2001	B1
6334587	Roder	Jan 2002	B1
6337712	Shiota et al.	Jan 2002	B1
6341845	Scheffelin et al.	Jan 2002	B1
6344904	Mercer	Feb 2002	B1
6353680	Hazra et al.	Mar 2002	B1
6356276	Acharya	Mar 2002	B1
6356308	Hovanky	Mar 2002	B1
6356357	Anderson et al.	Mar 2002	B1
6357865	Kubby et al.	Mar 2002	B1
6359650	Murakami	Mar 2002	B1
6362868	Silverbrook	Mar 2002	B1
6363239	Tutt et al.	Mar 2002	B1
6366319	Bills	Apr 2002	B1
6366694	Acharya	Apr 2002	B1
6370558	Guttag et al.	Apr 2002	B1
6375301	Childers et al.	Apr 2002	B1
6375314	Reed et al.	Apr 2002	B1
6377715	Fujieda et al.	Apr 2002	B1
6378997	Nitta	Apr 2002	B1
6381418	Spurr et al.	Apr 2002	B1
6386675	Wilson et al.	May 2002	B2
6386772	Klinefelter et al.	May 2002	B1
6389183	Han	May 2002	B1
6390368	Edwards	May 2002	B1
6390589	Imanaka et al.	May 2002	B1
6392699	Acharya	May 2002	B1
6402308	Hattori et al.	Jun 2002	B1
6404511	Lin et al.	Jun 2002	B1
6405055	Silverbrook et al.	Jun 2002	B1
6407777	DeLuca	Jun 2002	B1
6416152	Matsuzaki et al.	Jul 2002	B1
6421050	Ruml et al.	Jul 2002	B1
6425661	Silverbrook et al.	Jul 2002	B1
6431669	Silverbrook	Aug 2002	B1
6431703	Rousseau et al.	Aug 2002	B2
6437849	DeClerck et al.	Aug 2002	B1
6441921	Soscia	Aug 2002	B1
6442336	Lemelson	Aug 2002	B1
6442525	Silverbrook et al.	Aug 2002	B1
6445417	Yoshida et al.	Sep 2002	B1
6454375	Wilson et al.	Sep 2002	B2
6462835	Loushin et al.	Oct 2002	B1
6466618	Messing et al.	Oct 2002	B1
6472052	Silverbrook	Oct 2002	B1
6473123	Anderson	Oct 2002	B1
6473728	Tognazzini	Oct 2002	B1
6489990	Popovich	Dec 2002	B1
6493029	Denyer et al.	Dec 2002	B1
6493031	Washizawa	Dec 2002	B1
6496654	Silverbrook	Dec 2002	B1
6515761	Aoto et al.	Feb 2003	B2
6522767	Moskowitz et al.	Feb 2003	B1
6525763	Maeda	Feb 2003	B1
6526181	Smith et al.	Feb 2003	B1
6529287	Wang et al.	Mar 2003	B1
6529522	Ito et al.	Mar 2003	B1
6530519	Suzuki	Mar 2003	B1
6533181	Roxby et al.	Mar 2003	B1
6539180	King	Mar 2003	B1
6542622	Nelson et al.	Apr 2003	B1
6543880	Akhavain et al.	Apr 2003	B1
6546187	Miyazaki et al.	Apr 2003	B1
6547364	Silverbrook	Apr 2003	B2
6549575	Butter et al.	Apr 2003	B1
6552743	Rissman	Apr 2003	B1
6552821	Suzuki	Apr 2003	B2
6553459	Silverbrook et al.	Apr 2003	B1
6556245	Holmberg	Apr 2003	B1
6563538	Utagawa	May 2003	B1
6565196	Matsuo et al.	May 2003	B2
6570616	Chen	May 2003	B1
6571021	Braudaway	May 2003	B1
6573927	Parulski et al.	Jun 2003	B2
6573932	Adams et al.	Jun 2003	B1
6573936	Morris et al.	Jun 2003	B2
6573939	Yokoyama	Jun 2003	B1
6574363	Classen et al.	Jun 2003	B1
6577818	Hirano	Jun 2003	B2
6583820	Hung	Jun 2003	B1
6587140	No	Jul 2003	B2
6593938	Sakata et al.	Jul 2003	B1
6597384	Harrison	Jul 2003	B1
6597394	Duncan et al.	Jul 2003	B1
6597468	Inuiya	Jul 2003	B1
6597817	Silverbrook	Jul 2003	B1
6599196	Kikukawa et al.	Jul 2003	B2
6600930	Ukita et al.	Jul 2003	B1
6603864	Matsunoshita	Aug 2003	B1
6606171	Renk et al.	Aug 2003	B1
6607267	Testardi et al.	Aug 2003	B2
6608297	Neukermans et al.	Aug 2003	B2
6611631	Blair et al.	Aug 2003	B1
6614560	Silverbrook	Sep 2003	B1
6614914	Rhoads et al.	Sep 2003	B1
6618091	Tamura	Sep 2003	B1
6618117	Silverbrook	Sep 2003	B2
6618553	Shiohara	Sep 2003	B1
6619774	Kawai et al.	Sep 2003	B1
6619860	Simon	Sep 2003	B1
6622276	Nagasaki et al.	Sep 2003	B2
6622923	Walmsley et al.	Sep 2003	B1
6624848	Silverbrook et al.	Sep 2003	B1
6626529	King et al.	Sep 2003	B1
6627870	Lapstun et al.	Sep 2003	B1
6628326	Manico et al.	Sep 2003	B1
6628333	Gowda et al.	Sep 2003	B1
6628430	Silverbrook et al.	Sep 2003	B1
6633332	Nay et al.	Oct 2003	B1
6633667	Matsuoka	Oct 2003	B1
6634814	Spurr et al.	Oct 2003	B2
6636216	Silverbrook et al.	Oct 2003	B1
6636332	Soscia	Oct 2003	B1
6640004	Katayama et al.	Oct 2003	B2
6642956	Safai	Nov 2003	B1
6644764	Stephens, Jr.	Nov 2003	B2
6646757	Silverbrook	Nov 2003	B1
6647369	Silverbrook et al.	Nov 2003	B1
6650317	Boone et al.	Nov 2003	B1
6650365	Sato	Nov 2003	B1
6650366	Parulski et al.	Nov 2003	B2
6650975	Ruffner	Nov 2003	B2
6652089	Silverbrook	Nov 2003	B2
6652090	Silverbrook	Nov 2003	B2
6654051	Fujita et al.	Nov 2003	B1
6654057	Rhodes	Nov 2003	B1
6655776	Murray	Dec 2003	B2
6657657	Sato	Dec 2003	B1
6665454	Silverbrook et al.	Dec 2003	B1
6667759	Gerszberg et al.	Dec 2003	B2
6667771	Kweon	Dec 2003	B1
6670950	Chin et al.	Dec 2003	B1
6670985	Karube et al.	Dec 2003	B2
6678402	Jones et al.	Jan 2004	B2
6680749	Anderson et al.	Jan 2004	B1
6681055	Sato	Jan 2004	B1
6683996	Walmsley	Jan 2004	B1
6686970	Windle	Feb 2004	B1
6687383	Kanevsky et al.	Feb 2004	B1
6688528	Silverbrook	Feb 2004	B2
6688739	Murray	Feb 2004	B2
6690731	Gough et al.	Feb 2004	B1
6690881	Tomita et al.	Feb 2004	B1
6691922	Brooks et al.	Feb 2004	B2
6697107	Hamilton et al.	Feb 2004	B1
6697174	Mercer	Feb 2004	B2
6700619	Hamamura	Mar 2004	B1
6701361	Meier	Mar 2004	B1
6702417	Silverbrook	Mar 2004	B2
6704046	Dyas et al.	Mar 2004	B2
6710892	Narushima	Mar 2004	B2
6719415	Hattori	Apr 2004	B1
6726306	Keyes et al.	Apr 2004	B2
6727948	Silverbrook	Apr 2004	B1
6727951	Silverbrook	Apr 2004	B1
6731952	Schaeffer et al.	May 2004	B2
6732924	Ishigame et al.	May 2004	B2
6736321	Tsikos et al.	May 2004	B2
6738096	Silverbrook	May 2004	B1
6738903	Haines et al.	May 2004	B1
6741871	Silverbrook	May 2004	B1
6742887	Ando	Jun 2004	B2
6744526	McDermott et al.	Jun 2004	B2
6745331	Silverbrook	Jun 2004	B1
6749301	Silverbrook et al.	Jun 2004	B2
6750901	Silverbrook	Jun 2004	B1
6750944	Silverbrook et al.	Jun 2004	B2
6760164	Togino	Jul 2004	B2
6771811	Walmsley et al.	Aug 2004	B1
6773874	Silverbrook	Aug 2004	B2
6788336	Silverbrook et al.	Sep 2004	B1
6791605	Reele et al.	Sep 2004	B1
6795651	Silverbrook	Sep 2004	B2
6803989	Silverbrook	Oct 2004	B2
6807315	Walmsley et al.	Oct 2004	B1
6812972	Silverbrook et al.	Nov 2004	B1
6820968	Silverbrook	Nov 2004	B2
6823198	Kobayashi	Nov 2004	B2
6824257	Silverbrook	Nov 2004	B2
6831681	Silverbrook	Dec 2004	B1
6835135	Silverbrook et al.	Dec 2004	B1
6837635	Juan	Jan 2005	B1
6847686	Morad	Jan 2005	B2
6847883	Walmsley et al.	Jan 2005	B1
6854836	Ishinaga et al.	Feb 2005	B2
6858837	Tabata	Feb 2005	B2
6859225	Silverbrook et al.	Feb 2005	B1
6867882	Takahashi	Mar 2005	B1
6870566	Koide et al.	Mar 2005	B1
6870966	Silverbrook et al.	Mar 2005	B1
6879341	Silverbrook	Apr 2005	B1
6882364	Inuiya et al.	Apr 2005	B1
6883910	King et al.	Apr 2005	B2
6888649	Suzuki	May 2005	B2
6894794	Patton et al.	May 2005	B1
6903766	Silverbrook et al.	Jun 2005	B1
6906778	Silverbrook	Jun 2005	B2
6909456	Sasaki	Jun 2005	B1
6913875	Silverbrook et al.	Jul 2005	B2
6914686	Silverbrook et al.	Jul 2005	B2
6915140	Silverbrook	Jul 2005	B2
6918542	Silverbrook et al.	Jul 2005	B2
6918654	Silverbrook	Jul 2005	B2
6924835	Silverbrook et al.	Aug 2005	B1
6942334	Silverbrook et al.	Sep 2005	B2
6948661	Silverbrook et al.	Sep 2005	B2
6951390	King et al.	Oct 2005	B2
6953235	Silverbrook	Oct 2005	B2
6954254	Silverbrook	Oct 2005	B2
6958207	Khusnatdinov et al.	Oct 2005	B1
RE38896	Anderson	Nov 2005	E
6965691	Walmsley et al.	Nov 2005	B2
6967741	Silverbrook et al.	Nov 2005	B1
6967750	Silverbrook	Nov 2005	B2
6975429	Walmsley et al.	Dec 2005	B1
6977685	Acosta-Serafini et al.	Dec 2005	B1
6981765	King et al.	Jan 2006	B2
6981769	Silverbrook	Jan 2006	B2
6985207	Silverbrook	Jan 2006	B2
6995790	Higurashi et al.	Feb 2006	B2
6999206	Silverbrook	Feb 2006	B2
7006134	Arai et al.	Feb 2006	B1
7018294	Silverbrook et al.	Mar 2006	B2
7041916	Paul	May 2006	B2
7044589	Silverbrook	May 2006	B2
7050143	Silverbrook et al.	May 2006	B1
7058219	Walmsley et al.	Jun 2006	B2
7063408	Silverbrook et al.	Jun 2006	B2
7063940	Silverbrook	Jun 2006	B2
7068308	Feldis, III	Jun 2006	B2
7070270	King et al.	Jul 2006	B2
7075684	Silverbrook	Jul 2006	B2
7077515	Silverbrook	Jul 2006	B2
7077748	Silverbrook et al.	Jul 2006	B2
7079292	Silverbrook et al.	Jul 2006	B2
7081974	Silverbrook	Jul 2006	B2
7083108	Silverbrook et al.	Aug 2006	B2
7084951	Silverbrook	Aug 2006	B2
7086724	Silverbrook et al.	Aug 2006	B2
7092011	Silverbrook et al.	Aug 2006	B2
7092130	Silverbrook et al.	Aug 2006	B2
7095433	Touma et al.	Aug 2006	B1
7095533	Silverbrook et al.	Aug 2006	B2
7097263	Silverbrook	Aug 2006	B2
7099033	Silverbrook	Aug 2006	B2
7099051	Silverbrook	Aug 2006	B2
7101034	King et al.	Sep 2006	B2
7108343	King et al.	Sep 2006	B2
7110024	Silverbrook et al.	Sep 2006	B1
7110139	Silverbrook	Sep 2006	B2
7116355	Omura et al.	Oct 2006	B1
7118481	Silverbrook et al.	Oct 2006	B2
7119836	Silverbrook	Oct 2006	B2
7125337	Silverbrook	Oct 2006	B2
7125338	Silverbrook	Oct 2006	B2
7130075	Silverbrook	Oct 2006	B2
7136186	Silverbrook	Nov 2006	B2
7136198	Silverbrook	Nov 2006	B2
7139025	Berezin	Nov 2006	B1
7140723	Silverbrook	Nov 2006	B2
7140726	Silverbrook	Nov 2006	B2
7143944	Lapstun et al.	Dec 2006	B2
7145689	Silverbrook	Dec 2006	B2
7146179	Parulski et al.	Dec 2006	B2
7147294	Silverbrook	Dec 2006	B2
7148993	Silverbrook	Dec 2006	B2
7152805	Walmsley et al.	Dec 2006	B2
7154580	Silverbrook	Dec 2006	B2
7154626	Silverbrook et al.	Dec 2006	B2
7155394	Silverbrook et al.	Dec 2006	B2
7156512	Silverbrook	Jan 2007	B2
7158258	Silverbrook	Jan 2007	B2
7161709	Silverbrook	Jan 2007	B2
7161715	Silverbrook	Jan 2007	B2
7170652	Silverbrook	Jan 2007	B2
7173729	Silverbrook et al.	Feb 2007	B2
7175097	Walmsley et al.	Feb 2007	B2
7177055	Silverbrook	Feb 2007	B2
7185816	Shoobridge	Mar 2007	B1
7186499	Silverbrook	Mar 2007	B2
7187404	Silverbrook et al.	Mar 2007	B2
7193734	Silverbrook et al.	Mar 2007	B2
7201319	Silverbrook et al.	Apr 2007	B2
7227576	Umeyama	Jun 2007	B2
7234645	Silverbrook et al.	Jun 2007	B2
7234801	Silverbrook	Jun 2007	B2
7243849	Lapstun et al.	Jul 2007	B2
7248376	Walmsley et al.	Jul 2007	B2
7249839	King et al.	Jul 2007	B2
7250975	Silverbrook	Jul 2007	B2
7255646	Silverbrook et al.	Aug 2007	B2
7259772	Koh	Aug 2007	B2
7274455	Ok et al.	Sep 2007	B2
7274485	Silverbrook et al.	Sep 2007	B2
7278723	Silverbrook	Oct 2007	B2
7284843	Silverbrook	Oct 2007	B2
7286182	Silverbrook et al.	Oct 2007	B2
7286260	Silverbrook	Oct 2007	B2
7287706	Walmsley et al.	Oct 2007	B2
7291447	Silverbrook	Nov 2007	B2
7296304	Goldsborough	Nov 2007	B2
7301567	Silverbrook et al.	Nov 2007	B2
7310157	Walmsley et al.	Dec 2007	B2
7312845	Silverbrook	Dec 2007	B2
7341336	King et al.	Mar 2008	B2
7357497	Silverbrook	Apr 2008	B2
7369161	Easwar et al.	May 2008	B2
7370947	Silverbrook et al.	May 2008	B2
7377706	Silverbrook et al.	May 2008	B2
7385639	Silverbrook	Jun 2008	B2
7387573	Silverbrook et al.	Jun 2008	B2
7404633	Silverbrook et al.	Jul 2008	B2
7430067	Silverbrook	Sep 2008	B2
7443434	Silverbrook	Oct 2008	B2
7452048	Silverbrook	Nov 2008	B2
7453492	Silverbrook	Nov 2008	B2
7453586	Silverbrook et al.	Nov 2008	B2
7458676	King et al.	Dec 2008	B2
7460153	King et al.	Dec 2008	B2
7460882	Silverbrook	Dec 2008	B2
7466353	Silverbrook et al.	Dec 2008	B2
7466452	Silverbrook et al.	Dec 2008	B2
7468810	Silverbrook	Dec 2008	B2
7483053	Silverbrook	Jan 2009	B2
7492490	Silverbrook	Feb 2009	B2
7505068	Silverbrook	Mar 2009	B2
7517071	Silverbrook	Apr 2009	B2
7518634	Silverbrook et al.	Apr 2009	B2
7524045	Silverbrook	Apr 2009	B2
7525687	Silverbrook	Apr 2009	B2
7556564	Silverbrook	Jul 2009	B2
7557853	Silverbrook	Jul 2009	B2
7564580	Silverbrook	Jul 2009	B2
7575313	Silverbrook	Aug 2009	B2
7576775	Silverbrook et al.	Aug 2009	B2
7576794	Silverbrook	Aug 2009	B2
7576795	Silverbrook	Aug 2009	B2
7581683	Walmsley et al.	Sep 2009	B2
7581826	Silverbrook	Sep 2009	B2
7585067	Walmsley	Sep 2009	B2
7588323	King et al.	Sep 2009	B2
7590347	Silverbrook	Sep 2009	B2
7591547	King et al.	Sep 2009	B2
7602423	Silverbrook	Oct 2009	B2
7604345	Silverbrook	Oct 2009	B2
7605851	Silverbrook et al.	Oct 2009	B2
7609397	Lapstun et al.	Oct 2009	B2
7609410	Lapstun et al.	Oct 2009	B2
7612825	Silverbrook et al.	Nov 2009	B2
7621607	Silverbrook	Nov 2009	B2
7629999	Silverbrook	Dec 2009	B2
7631961	Silverbrook et al.	Dec 2009	B2
7633535	Silverbrook	Dec 2009	B2
7637594	Silverbrook et al.	Dec 2009	B2
7646403	Silverbrook et al.	Jan 2010	B2
7654626	Silverbrook et al.	Feb 2010	B2
7654905	Silverbrook et al.	Feb 2010	B2
7664647	Silverbrook et al.	Feb 2010	B2
7665834	Silverbrook	Feb 2010	B2
7688369	Silverbrook et al.	Mar 2010	B2
7690765	Silverbrook	Apr 2010	B2
7695108	Silverbrook	Apr 2010	B2
7701506	Silverbrook	Apr 2010	B2
7703910	Silverbrook	Apr 2010	B2
7705891	Silverbrook	Apr 2010	B2
7724282	Silverbrook	May 2010	B2
7742696	Silverbrook	Jun 2010	B2
7750971	Silverbrook	Jul 2010	B2
7753508	Silverbrook	Jul 2010	B2
7758166	Silverbrook	Jul 2010	B2
7773124	Silverbrook et al.	Aug 2010	B2
7773125	Silverbrook	Aug 2010	B2
7784931	King et al.	Aug 2010	B2
7796166	Silverbrook	Sep 2010	B2
7854500	King et al.	Dec 2010	B2
7866794	Silverbrook et al.	Jan 2011	B2
7905574	Silverbrook	Mar 2011	B2
7907178	Silverbrook et al.	Mar 2011	B2
7936395	Silverbrook	May 2011	B2
7942332	Silverbrook et al.	May 2011	B2
7957009	Silverbrook	Jun 2011	B2
7961249	Silverbrook	Jun 2011	B2
7965416	Silverbrook	Jun 2011	B2
7970275	Silverbrook	Jun 2011	B2
8020979	Silverbrook	Sep 2011	B2
8098285	Silverbrook	Jan 2012	B2
8274665	Silverbrook	Sep 2012	B2
8328101	Silverbrook et al.	Dec 2012	B2
8421869	Silverbrook et al.	Apr 2013	B2
20010000172	Barrus et al.	Apr 2001	A1
20010001563	Tomaszewski	May 2001	A1
20010007458	Purcell et al.	Jul 2001	A1
20010013890	Narayanaswami	Aug 2001	A1
20010015760	Fellegara et al.	Aug 2001	A1
20010015818	Kawanabe et al.	Aug 2001	A1
20010019561	Staats	Sep 2001	A1
20010020960	Ikemoto et al.	Sep 2001	A1
20010022661	Fujimoto et al.	Sep 2001	A1
20010023523	Kubby et al.	Sep 2001	A1
20010030692	Yoneda	Oct 2001	A1
20010033332	Kato et al.	Oct 2001	A1
20010035887	Altfather et al.	Nov 2001	A1
20010040574	Prater	Nov 2001	A1
20010040625	Okada et al.	Nov 2001	A1
20010040633	Yang	Nov 2001	A1
20010055121	Omura et al.	Dec 2001	A1
20010055983	Ohmura et al.	Dec 2001	A1
20020001032	Ohki	Jan 2002	A1
20020003578	Koshiba et al.	Jan 2002	A1
20020011558	Neukermans et al.	Jan 2002	A1
20020015592	Kawamura et al.	Feb 2002	A1
20020024570	Childers et al.	Feb 2002	A1
20020024603	Nakayama et al.	Feb 2002	A1
20020025079	Kuwata et al.	Feb 2002	A1
20020033854	Silverbrook et al.	Mar 2002	A1
20020047881	Lewis et al.	Apr 2002	A1
20020047904	Okada	Apr 2002	A1
20020050518	Roustaei	May 2002	A1
20020054212	Fukuoka	May 2002	A1
20020063760	Dietl et al.	May 2002	A1
20020071051	Ikeda	Jun 2002	A1
20020071104	Silverbrook	Jun 2002	A1
20020080247	Takahashi et al.	Jun 2002	A1
20020101524	Acharya	Aug 2002	A1
20020135266	Boutaghou	Sep 2002	A1
20020140993	Silverbrook et al.	Oct 2002	A1
20020141750	Ludtke et al.	Oct 2002	A1
20020158135	Hsu	Oct 2002	A1
20020164147	Suda	Nov 2002	A1
20020176009	Johnson et al.	Nov 2002	A1
20020180873	Misawa	Dec 2002	A1
20020180879	Shiohara	Dec 2002	A1
20030001957	Kubota	Jan 2003	A1
20030043273	Suzuki	Mar 2003	A1
20030076551	Kawai et al.	Apr 2003	A1
20040001608	Rhoads	Jan 2004	A1
20040006256	Suzuki et al.	Jan 2004	A1
20040018035	Petteruti et al.	Jan 2004	A1
20040032501	Silverbrook	Feb 2004	A1
20040032506	Silverbrook	Feb 2004	A1
20040066447	Arnold	Apr 2004	A1
20040070662	Shimoda	Apr 2004	A1
20040090505	King et al.	May 2004	A1
20040119827	Silverbrook et al.	Jun 2004	A1
20040125209	Silverbrook	Jul 2004	A1
20040141061	Silverbrook	Jul 2004	A1
20040196350	Silverbrook	Oct 2004	A1
20040201764	Honda et al.	Oct 2004	A1
20040207698	Katayama	Oct 2004	A1
20040252332	McCoog et al.	Dec 2004	A1
20040257446	Silverbrook	Dec 2004	A1
20050030554	Dixon et al.	Feb 2005	A1
20050030568	Narushima et al.	Feb 2005	A1
20050062813	King et al.	Mar 2005	A1
20050088527	Silverbrook	Apr 2005	A1
20050104941	Tanaka	May 2005	A1
20050146613	Silverbrook et al.	Jul 2005	A1
20050179758	Campillo et al.	Aug 2005	A1
20050179781	Silverbrook	Aug 2005	A1
20050270503	Silverbrook	Dec 2005	A1
20050280878	Silverbrook	Dec 2005	A1
20060007261	Silverbrook	Jan 2006	A1
20060056728	Silverbrook et al.	Mar 2006	A1
20060072781	Harrington	Apr 2006	A1
20060098232	Nakano et al.	May 2006	A1
20060126102	Sakuda	Jun 2006	A1
20060133738	Marcinkiewicz et al.	Jun 2006	A1
20060197847	Johnson et al.	Sep 2006	A1
20060239676	Parulski et al.	Oct 2006	A1
20060250433	Silverbrook et al.	Nov 2006	A1
20060250438	Silverbrook	Nov 2006	A1
20060250439	Silverbrook et al.	Nov 2006	A1
20060250461	Silverbrook et al.	Nov 2006	A1
20060250469	Silverbrook et al.	Nov 2006	A1
20060250470	Lapstun et al.	Nov 2006	A1
20060250479	Silverbrook	Nov 2006	A1
20060250482	Silverbrook	Nov 2006	A1
20060250484	Silverbrook et al.	Nov 2006	A1
20060250489	Silverbrook	Nov 2006	A1
20060252456	King et al.	Nov 2006	A1
20070003168	Oliver	Jan 2007	A1
20070013790	Nakase	Jan 2007	A1
20070021144	Atkinson et al.	Jan 2007	A1
20070024685	Silverbrook	Feb 2007	A1
20070040856	Silverbrook	Feb 2007	A1
20070046754	Silverbrook	Mar 2007	A1
20070070421	Silverbrook et al.	Mar 2007	A1
20070070453	Silverbrook	Mar 2007	A1
20070081187	Silverbrook	Apr 2007	A1
20070099675	Silverbrook	May 2007	A1
20070109611	Silverbrook	May 2007	A1
20070121177	Silverbrook	May 2007	A1
20080002215	Silverbrook et al.	Jan 2008	A1
20080036874	Silverbrook et al.	Feb 2008	A1
20080062232	Silverbrook	Mar 2008	A1
20080068406	Silverbrook et al.	Mar 2008	A1
20080098208	Reid et al.	Apr 2008	A1
20080152414	Silverbrook	Jun 2008	A1
20080204486	Silverbrook	Aug 2008	A1
20080252732	Silverbrook	Oct 2008	A1
20080300015	Silverbrook	Dec 2008	A1
20090015605	Silverbrook	Jan 2009	A1
20090027707	Silverbrook et al.	Jan 2009	A1
20090029731	Silverbrook	Jan 2009	A1
20090029732	Silverbrook	Jan 2009	A1
20090052879	Silverbrook	Feb 2009	A1
20090073231	Silverbrook et al.	Mar 2009	A1
20090075695	Silverbrook	Mar 2009	A1
20090085968	Silverbrook et al.	Apr 2009	A1
20090141291	Yumiki et al.	Jun 2009	A1
20090207208	Silverbrook	Aug 2009	A1
20090244292	Silverbrook et al.	Oct 2009	A1
20090264151	Silverbrook	Oct 2009	A1
20090278944	Silverbrook et al.	Nov 2009	A1
20090291708	Silverbrook	Nov 2009	A1
20090295887	King et al.	Dec 2009	A1
20100002062	King et al.	Jan 2010	A1
20100085471	Craven-Bartle	Apr 2010	A1
20100100706	Inoue et al.	Apr 2010	A1
20100157383	Ichikawa et al.	Jun 2010	A1
20100194923	Silverbrook	Aug 2010	A1
20110211048	Silverbrook	Sep 2011	A1
20110211080	Silverbrook	Sep 2011	A1
20130010076	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130010083	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130010122	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130010126	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130010127	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130010130	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130010131	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130010132	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130010148	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130010149	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130010152	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130016227	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130016228	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130016229	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130016230	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130016231	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130016234	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130016247	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130016265	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130016280	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130021443	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130021444	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130021480	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130021481	Silverbrook	Jan 2013	A1
20130063568	Silverbrook	Mar 2013	A1
20130222617	Silverbrook	Aug 2013	A1

Foreign Referenced Citations (262)

Number	Date	Country
96-44491	Aug 1996	AU
5541498	Aug 1998	AU
199855415	Aug 1998	AU
2079534	Apr 1993	CA
248983	Aug 1987	DE
4444295	Jun 1996	DE
19832369	Jan 2000	DE
10001768	Aug 2000	DE
771101	May 1977	EP
771102	May 1977	EP
89114858.7	Aug 1989	EP
0332787	Sep 1989	EP
0354581	Feb 1990	EP
0382044	Aug 1990	EP
0398295	Nov 1990	EP
0402016	Dec 1990	EP
0440261	Feb 1991	EP
0574581	Mar 1991	EP
0430692	Jun 1991	EP
0438841	Jul 1991	EP
0512709	Nov 1992	EP
0512799	Nov 1992	EP
520289	Dec 1992	EP
0670555	Sep 1993	EP
0568357	Nov 1993	EP
3083015	Dec 1993	EP
408241	Oct 1994	EP
0650125	Apr 1995	EP
0670555	Sep 1995	EP
676291	Oct 1995	EP
0748697	Feb 1996	EP
0709825	May 1996	EP
0720915	Jul 1996	EP
725364	Aug 1996	EP
0732859	Sep 1996	EP
735420	Oct 1996	EP
0755162	Jan 1997	EP
0779736	Jan 1997	EP
0761450	Mar 1997	EP
0763430	Mar 1997	EP
0763930	Mar 1997	EP
0782053	Jul 1997	EP
0822078	Feb 1998	EP
825758	Feb 1998	EP
0848540	Jun 1998	EP
0848540	Jul 1998	EP
0884197	Dec 1998	EP
907139	Apr 1999	EP
0912035	Apr 1999	EP
913814	May 1999	EP
924647	Jun 1999	EP
0935384	Aug 1999	EP
949804	Oct 1999	EP
965451	Dec 1999	EP
974924	Jan 2000	EP
978799	Feb 2000	EP
1039351	Sep 2000	EP
1080917	Mar 2001	EP
1129388	Sep 2001	EP
0652108	Feb 2003	EP
1289309	Mar 2003	EP
1389876	Feb 2004	EP
1520594	Aug 1978	GB
1595797	Jun 1981	GB
2212481	Jul 1989	GB
2228579	Aug 1990	GB
2242753	Oct 1991	GB
2263841	Aug 1993	GB
2299787	Oct 1996	GB
2327838	Feb 1999	GB
2346110	Aug 2000	GB
57-107339	Jul 1982	JP
57-208547	Dec 1982	JP
57-208547	Dec 1983	JP
59-128144	Jul 1984	JP
59-190857	Oct 1984	JP
60-096067	May 1985	JP
60-136480	Jul 1985	JP
60-204361	Oct 1985	JP
61-129740	Jun 1986	JP
62-32778	Feb 1987	JP
62-081164	Mar 1987	JP
62-245857	Oct 1987	JP
62-272682	Nov 1987	JP
63-046193	Feb 1988	JP
63-145071	Jun 1988	JP
01-114858	May 1989	JP
01-148587	Jun 1989	JP
01-267254	Oct 1989	JP
01-277979	Nov 1989	JP
1292483	Nov 1989	JP
02-30543	Jan 1990	JP
02-302181	Feb 1990	JP
02-096880	Apr 1990	JP
02-178163	Jul 1990	JP
02-188259	Jul 1990	JP
02-241760	Sep 1990	JP
2241760	Sep 1990	JP
03-011483	Jan 1991	JP
03-14879	Jan 1991	JP
3127341	May 1991	JP
03-227875	Oct 1991	JP
04-1051	Jan 1992	JP
04-105113	Apr 1992	JP
04-200184	Jul 1992	JP
04-200186	Jul 1992	JP
04-232084	Aug 1992	JP
04-282995	Oct 1992	JP
04-286444	Oct 1992	JP
05-016377	Jan 1993	JP
05-056160	Mar 1993	JP
05-064045	Mar 1993	JP
05-108278	Apr 1993	JP
05-137147	Jun 1993	JP
05-201081	Aug 1993	JP
05-208773	Aug 1993	JP
05-330150	Dec 1993	JP
06-37944	Feb 1994	JP
06-064160	Mar 1994	JP
06-086197	Mar 1994	JP
06-103358	Apr 1994	JP
06-138588	May 1994	JP
06-149051	May 1994	JP
06-161047	Jun 1994	JP
06-183117	Jul 1994	JP
06-205147	Jul 1994	JP
06-238958	Aug 1994	JP
07-001874	Jan 1995	JP
07-009680	Jan 1995	JP
07-315590	Feb 1995	JP
07-059107	Mar 1995	JP
07-108688	Apr 1995	JP
07-108786	Apr 1995	JP
07-129762	May 1995	JP
07-234911	Sep 1995	JP
07-254038	Oct 1995	JP
07-285250	Oct 1995	JP
07-298123	Nov 1995	JP
07-307956	Nov 1995	JP
08-002754	Jan 1996	JP
08-79417	Mar 1996	JP
08-90879	Apr 1996	JP
08-113990	May 1996	JP
08-118653	May 1996	JP
08-129634	May 1996	JP
08-137882	May 1996	JP
08-185492	Jul 1996	JP
08-216384	Aug 1996	JP
08-224730	Sep 1996	JP
08-224865	Sep 1996	JP
08-249409	Sep 1996	JP
08-276600	Oct 1996	JP
09-005902	Jan 1997	JP
09-008592	Jan 1997	JP
09-015766	Jan 1997	JP
09-300645	Jan 1997	JP
09024631	Jan 1997	JP
09-036941	Feb 1997	JP
09-039318	Feb 1997	JP
09-058883	Mar 1997	JP
09-065182	Mar 1997	JP
09-069064	Mar 1997	JP
09-071015	Mar 1997	JP
09-076532	Mar 1997	JP
09-076584	Mar 1997	JP
09065266	Mar 1997	JP
09-090513	Apr 1997	JP
09-113990	May 1997	JP
09-116843	May 1997	JP
09-123474	May 1997	JP
09-135316	May 1997	JP
09-149311	Jun 1997	JP
09-163196	Jun 1997	JP
09-187040	Jul 1997	JP
09-187960	Jul 1997	JP
09-261382	Oct 1997	JP
09-267487	Oct 1997	JP
09-314918	Dec 1997	JP
09-327906	Dec 1997	JP
10-000183	Jan 1998	JP
10-065780	Mar 1998	JP
10-107981	Apr 1998	JP
10-112855	Apr 1998	JP
10-126728	May 1998	JP
10-155053	Jun 1998	JP
10-164538	Jun 1998	JP
10-164602	Jun 1998	JP
10-229533	Aug 1998	JP
10-235957	Sep 1998	JP
10-264479	Oct 1998	JP
10-294918	Nov 1998	JP
10-301718	Nov 1998	JP
11-122565	Apr 1999	JP
11122565	Apr 1999	JP
11-155053	Jun 1999	JP
11-164184	Jun 1999	JP
11-164248	Jun 1999	JP
11-167173	Jun 1999	JP
11-176173	Jul 1999	JP
11-187194	Jul 1999	JP
11-205517	Jul 1999	JP
11-227367	Aug 1999	JP
11-254700	Sep 1999	JP
11243516	Sep 1999	JP
11249233	Sep 1999	JP
11-275501	Oct 1999	JP
11-298910	Oct 1999	JP
11275418	Oct 1999	JP
11275501	Oct 1999	JP
11317897	Nov 1999	JP
2000-099616	Apr 2000	JP
2000-141788	May 2000	JP
2000-158712	Jun 2000	JP
2000-158720	Jun 2000	JP
2000-196931	Jul 2000	JP
2000-207512	Jul 2000	JP
2000-222520	Aug 2000	JP
2000-284370	Oct 2000	JP
2001-008153	Jan 2001	JP
2001-144459	May 2001	JP
2001-169222	Jun 2001	JP
2002-0158135	Dec 2002	JP
1019930005409	Mar 1993	KR
1019960015313	May 1996	KR
1019960704320	Aug 1996	KR
1002270420000	Oct 1999	KR
WO 8303941	Nov 1983	WO
WO 8605641	Sep 1986	WO
WO 8707741	Dec 1987	WO
WO 9114336	Sep 1991	WO
WO 9114338	Sep 1991	WO
WO 9115078	Oct 1991	WO
WO 9210058	Jun 1992	WO
WO 9304425	Mar 1993	WO
WO 9316323	Aug 1993	WO
WO 9502247	Jan 1995	WO
WO 9516323	Jun 1995	WO
WO 9608114	Mar 1996	WO
WO 9632265	Oct 1996	WO
WO 9632274	Oct 1996	WO
WO 9632278	Oct 1996	WO
WO 9632281	Oct 1996	WO
WO 9632808	Oct 1996	WO
WO 9639301	Dec 1996	WO
WO 9704353	Feb 1997	WO
WO 9705738	Feb 1997	WO
WO 9706958	Feb 1997	WO
WO 9732265	Sep 1997	WO
WO 9750243	Dec 1997	WO
WO 9818253	Apr 1998	WO
WO 9830021	Jul 1998	WO
WO 9848567	Oct 1998	WO
WO 9904368	Jan 1999	WO
WO 9904388	Jan 1999	WO
WO 9904551	Jan 1999	WO
WO 9950787	Oct 1999	WO
WO 0023279	Apr 2000	WO
WO 0028379	May 2000	WO
WO 0071348	Nov 2000	WO
WO 0235286	May 2002	WO
WO 02093902	Nov 2002	WO
WO 03095224	Nov 2003	WO

Non-Patent Literature Citations (125)

Entry
Biemond et al., “A Fast Kalman Filter for Images Degraded by Both Blur and Noise,” SPIE Milestone Series: Selected Papers on Digital Image Restoration 74: 167-165 (Oct. 1983).
Chi, Min-hwa, “Technologies for High Performance CMOS Active Pixel Imaging System-on-a-chip,” IEEE, 0-7803-4306-9, pp. 180-183 (Oct. 1998).
Connolly et al., “A study of efficiency and accuracy in the transformation from RGB to CIELAB color space,” IEEE Transactions on Image Processing 6(7): 1046-1048 (Jul. 1997).
Dunsmore et al., “A low-cost megapixel digital camera using high-performance in-camera image processing” Proceedings, IS&T's PICS Conference. Annual Conference, Proceedings of Conference for the Society of Imaging Science and Technology 67-70 (May 17,1998).
“HEDR-8000 Series Reflective Optical Surface Mount Encoders Data Sheet,” Avago Technologies p. 2 (May 2006).
Kasson et al., “Performing Color Space Conversations with Three-Dimensional Linear Interpolation,” Journal of Electronic Imagining 4(3): 226-249 (Jul. 1, 1995).
Krishnan et al., A Miniture Surface Mount Reflective Optical Shaft Encoder, Hewlett-Packard Journal (Dec. 1996).
“Polaroid Introduces New Single-Use Instant Camera”, Newswire, Sep. 16, 1998.
Fujioka et al., Reconfigurable parallel VLSI processor for dynamic control of intelligent robots, IEE Proc.-Comput. Digit Tech., 143(1): 23-29 (Jan. 1996).
Ostromoukhov et al., “Halftoning by Rotating Non-Bayer Dispersed Dither Arrays”,Procedings of the SPIE—The International Socciety for Optical Engineering, vol. 2411, pp. 180-197, 1995.
Ostromoukhov et al, Rotated Disperser Dither: a New Technique for Digital Halftoning, Computer Graphics Proceedings 123-130 Jul. 24, 1994.
Smith et al., “A Single-Chip 306×244-Pixel CMOS NTSC Video Camera,” ISSCC98, Session 11, Image Sensors, Paper FA 11.2, pp. 170-171 (Feb. 6, 1998).
Sukemura T., “FR500 VLIW—Architecture High-preformance Embedded Microprocessor” Fujitsu-Scientific and Technical Journal 36(1): 31-38 (Jun. 2000).
Texas Instruments, TMS320C80 Parallel Processor (User's Guide), 1995, pp. iii; pp. 1-5 and pp. 2-8; fig. 2-3 MVP crossbar.
Wawrzynek et al, Spert-11: A Vector Microprocessor System, Mar. 1996, IEEE, pp. 79-86.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 12/850,627 Mailed Nov. 6, 2013.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/540,613 Mailed Dec. 17, 2013.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,917 Mailed Nov. 6, 2013.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,924 Mailed Dec. 27, 13.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,971 Mailed Dec. 4, 13.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,977 Mailed Dec. 17, 2013.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/621,026 Mailed Dec. 24, 2013.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/621,040 Mailed Jan. 17, 2014.
Texas Instruments, TMS320C80 (MVP) Video Controller (User's Guide), 1995.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 12/114,813 Mailed Apr. 30, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/621,026 Mailed Jun. 3, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Notice of Allowance Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,872 Mailed Jun. 6, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,917 Mailed Jun. 17, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,891 Mailed Jun. 18, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,977 Mailed Jul. 7, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,965 Mailed Jul. 18, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,969 Mailed Jul. 23, 2014.
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 98933349.7(Oct. 16, 2002).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00929022.2 (Feb. 18, 2005).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00929026.3 (Apr. 2, 2004).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00929024.8 (Dec. 6, 2004).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00929025.5 (Jun. 2, 2004).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00962074.1 (May 9, 2003).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00962075.8 (Jun. 5, 2003).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00967420.1 (May 20, 2003).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00962076.6 (May 8, 2003).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 01975879.6 (Jan. 2, 2006).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 01977985.9 (Feb. 11, 2005).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 98933351.3 (Jun. 12, 2003).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00929017.2 (Mar. 16, 2004).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00929018.0 (Apr. 2, 2004).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00929019.8 (Jul. 4, 2002).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00929020.6 (Jul. 25, 2002).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00929021.4 (Oct. 26, 2004).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00929023.0 (May 27, 2003).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00929028.9 (Apr. 27, 2004).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00929029.7 (Mar. 31, 2004).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00929030.5 (Mar. 24, 2004).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 00929031.3 (May 8, 2003).
European Patent Office, Supplementary European Search Report in European Patent Application No. 99957715.8 (Jun. 21, 2006).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU98/00544 (Sep. 9, 1998).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU98/00549 (Sep. 9, 1998).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU99/00985 (Jan. 19, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/00515 (Aug. 1, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/00514 (Aug. 3, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/00513 (Aug. 1, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/00512 (Aug. 3, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/00510 (Aug. 18, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/00509 (Aug. 18, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/00508 (Aug. 29, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/00507 (Aug. 3, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/00506 (Aug. 3, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/00505 (Aug. 29, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/00504 (Aug. 3, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/00503 (Jul. 10, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/00502 (Jul. 24, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/00501 (Aug. 3, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/01076 (Nov. 16, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/01075 (Nov. 16, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/01074 (Nov. 20, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU00/01073 (Nov. 16, 2000).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU01/01326 (Dec. 1, 2001).
Australian Patent Office, International Search Report in International Patent Application No. PCT/AU01/01317 (Jan. 8, 2002).
“Suppliers Focus on Teens” Chain Drug Review 22(17): p. 30 Full Text (Oct. 9, 2000).
Cipra, Barry, “The Ubiquitous Reed-Solomon Codes” Siam News, 26(1) (Jan. 1993).
IS&T 46th Annual Conference in Cambridge, Massachusetts “First Impressions: Digital Photography” the Society for Imaging Science and Technology (May 11, 1993).
Curtis et al., “Computer-Generated Watercolor”, Proceedings of SIGGRAPH 97, Computer Graphic Proceedings pp. 421-430 (1997).
Fisher, Joseph A., “Very Long Instruction Word Architectures and the ELI-512” ACM, International Symposium on Computer Architecture, pp. 140-150 (1983).
Foley et al., Computer Graphics: Principles and Practice, Second Edition, pp. 604-853, 1990.
Gonzalez, R.C. and Woods, R.E., “Image Segmentation:Region-Oriented Segmentation” Digital Image Processing, Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc., pp. 458-462 (1992).
Hayat et al., “A Fast Thinning Algorithm Based on Image Compression” IEEE, pp. 2661-2664 (1991).
Henrich, D., “Space-efficient Region Filling in Raster Graphics” The Visual Computer: An International Journal of Computer Graphics (1993).
Hsu et al., “Drawing and Animation Using Skeletal Strokes”, Proceedings of SIGGRAPH 94, Computer Graphic Proceedings pp. 1-9 (1994).
Jaspers, E G T et al., “A Generic 2d Sharpness Enhancement Algorithm for Luminance Signals”, Sixth International Conference on Image Processing and Its Applications (Conf. Publ. No. 443), pp. 14-17.( Jul. 1997).
Litwinowicz, “Processing Images and Video for an Impressionist Effect”, Proceedings of SIGGRAPH 97, Computer Graphic Proceedings pp. 1-9 (1997).
Liu, N. et al., “Improved Method for Color Image Enhancement Based on Luminance and Color Contrast”, Journal of Electronic Imaging, SPIE IS&T, vol. 3, No. 2, 1 pp. 190-197 (Apr. 1994).
Meade, Instruction Manual for Meade 7″ LX200 Maksutov-Cassegrain Telescope 8″, 10″ and 12″ LX200 Schmidt-Cassegrain Telescopes, Meade Instruments Corporation, 1-16 (1996).
Ogniewicz, Skeleton-Space: A Multiscale Space Description Combining Region and Boundary Information, IEEE, pp. 746-751(1994).
Ohyama, S., Optical Sheet Memory System, Electronics and Communications in Japan, Part 2, vol. 75, No. 4, (1992).
Ohzu et al., “Behind the Scenes of Virtual Reality: Vision and Motion” Proceedings of the IEEE, Invited Paper, 84(5): pp. 782-798 (May 1996).
Ong et al., “Image Analysis of Tissue Sections” Computers in Biology and Medicine, 26(3): pp. 269-279 (May 1996).
Parulski, K.A. et al., “High-Performance Digital Color Video Camera” Journal of Electronic Imaging, SPIE IS&T, vol. 1, No. 1, pp. 35-45 (1992).
Petit et al., “VLIW Processor Architecture Adapted to FPAs”, The International Society for Optical Engineering, 3410(99): pp. 128-132 (May 1998).
Russ, John C., “Segmentation and Thresholding” The Image Processing Handbook, 2nd Edition, pp. 355-361 (1994).
Sakamoto,T. et al., “Software Pixel Interpolation for Digital Still Cameras Suitable for a 32-Bit MCU”, IEEE Transactions on Consumer Electronics 44(4):pp. 1342-1352 (1998).
Salisbury et al., “Interactive Pen-and-Ink Illustration”, Proceedings of SIGGRAPH 94, Computer Graphic Proceedings pp. 101-108 (1994).
Singh et al., “Object Skeletons From Sparse Shapes in Industrial Image Settings”, Proceedings of the 1998 IEEE, pp. 3388-3393 (1998).
Takovacs, Gregory T.A., “Mechanical Transducers” Micromachined Transducers Sourcebook, pp. 289-293 (1998).
Thorpe et al., “The All-Digital Camcorder-The Arrival of Electronic Cinematography”, SMPTE Journal, pp. 13-30 (Jan. 1996).
Topfer, K., Adams, J.E., Keelan B.W., “Modulation Transfer Functions and Aliasing Patterns of CFA Interpolation Algorithms” Proceedings IS&T's Pics Conference. 51st Annual Conference, pp. 367-370, (1998).
Yarmish et al., “Meet the Computer: A Computer System” Assembly Language Fundamentals 360/370 OS/VS DOS/VS, pp. 13-16 (1979).
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,861 Mailed Mar. 6, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,872 Mailed Mar. 20, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,933 Mailed Mar. 21, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,939 Mailed Mar. 21, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,918 Mailed Mar. 25, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,832 Mailed Apr. 3, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,971 Mailed Apr. 14, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,857 Mailed Jan. 29, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,969 Mailed Feb. 6, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,879 Mailed Sep. 12, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,939 Mailed Sep. 12, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,924 Mailed Oct. 10, 2014.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/621,046 Mailed Feb. 18, 2015.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/856,761 Mailed Mar. 16, 2015.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,861 Mailed Apr. 6, 2015.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,924 Mailed Apr. 21, 2015.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,965 Mailed Apr. 27, 2015.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Notice of Allowance Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,838 Mailed Jul. 13, 2015.
United States Patent and Trademark Office, Office Action Issued in U.S. Appl. No. 13/620,879 Mailed Oct. 5, 2015.

Related Publications (1)

	Number	Date	Country
	20130016229 A1	Jan 2013	US

Continuations (4)

	Number	Date	Country
Parent	13104021	May 2011	US
Child	13620919		US
Parent	12758730	Apr 2010	US
Child	13104021		US
Parent	11045442	Jan 2005	US
Child	12758730		US
Parent	09112786	Jul 1998	US
Child	11045442		US

Central processor with multiple programmable processor units

Information

Patent Number

Date Filed

Date Issued

Inventors

Original Assignees

Examiners

Agents

CPC

Field of Search

US

CPC

International Classifications

Disclaimer

Term Extension

Abstract

Description

Claims

Priority Claims (2)

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATION

US Referenced Citations (1739)

Foreign Referenced Citations (262)

Non-Patent Literature Citations (125)

Related Publications (1)

Continuations (4)